1% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. 2% 3% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. 4\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi 5% 6\def\texinfoversion{2022-01-02.12} 7% 8% Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990-2021 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 9% 10% This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or 11% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as 12% published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the 13% License, or (at your option) any later version. 14% 15% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be 16% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty 17% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU 18% General Public License for more details. 19% 20% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License 21% along with this program. If not, see <https://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. 22% 23% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing 24% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without 25% restriction. This Exception is an additional permission under section 7 26% of the GNU General Public License, version 3 ("GPLv3"). 27% 28% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug 29% reports; you can get the latest version from: 30% https://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/ (the Texinfo release area), or 31% https://ftpmirror.gnu.org/texinfo/ (same, via a mirror), or 32% https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page) 33% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out 34% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. 35% 36% Send bug reports to [email protected]. Please include a 37% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the 38% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated. 39% 40% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the 41% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple 42% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this: 43% tex foo.texi 44% texindex foo.?? 45% tex foo.texi 46% tex foo.texi 47% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps. 48% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct. 49% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more 50% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. 51% 52% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some 53% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the 54% full Texinfo distribution. 55% 56% The GNU Texinfo home page is https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo. 57 58 59\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} 60 61% If in a .fmt file, print the version number 62% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because 63% they might have appeared in the input file name. 64\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% 65 \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} 66 67% LaTeX's \typeout. This ensures that the messages it is used for 68% are identical in format to the corresponding ones from latex/pdflatex. 69\def\typeout{\immediate\write17}% 70 71\chardef\other=12 72 73% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo. 74% For @tex, we can use \tabalign. 75\let\+ = \relax 76 77% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine. 78\let\ptexb=\b 79\let\ptexbullet=\bullet 80\let\ptexc=\c 81\let\ptexcomma=\, 82\let\ptexdot=\. 83\let\ptexdots=\dots 84\let\ptexend=\end 85\let\ptexequiv=\equiv 86\let\ptexexclam=\! 87\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote 88\let\ptexgtr=> 89\let\ptexhat=^ 90\let\ptexi=\i 91\let\ptexindent=\indent 92\let\ptexinsert=\insert 93\let\ptexlbrace=\{ 94\let\ptexless=< 95\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite 96\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent 97\let\ptexplus=+ 98\let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright 99\let\ptexrbrace=\} 100\let\ptexslash=\/ 101\let\ptexsp=\sp 102\let\ptexstar=\* 103\let\ptexsup=\sup 104\let\ptext=\t 105\let\ptextop=\top 106{\catcode`\'=\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% active in plain's math mode 107 108% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it 109% starts a new line in the output. 110\newlinechar = `^^J 111 112% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error 113% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. 114% 115\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined 116 \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0. 117\else 118 \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space} 119\fi 120 121% Set up fixed words for English if not already set. 122\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi 123\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi 124\ifx\putworderror\undefined \gdef\putworderror{error}\fi 125\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi 126\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi 127\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi 128\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi 129\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi 130\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi 131\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi 132\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi 133\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi 134\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi 135\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi 136\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi 137\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi 138\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi 139\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi 140\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi 141\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi 142% 143\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi 144\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi 145\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi 146\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi 147\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi 148\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi 149\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi 150\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi 151\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi 152\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi 153\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi 154\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi 155% 156\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi 157\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi 158\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi 159\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi 160\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi 161 162% Give the space character the catcode for a space. 163\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =10\relax} 164 165% Likewise for ^^M, the end of line character. 166\def\endlineisspace{\catcode13=10\relax} 167 168\chardef\dashChar = `\- 169\chardef\slashChar = `\/ 170\chardef\underChar = `\_ 171 172% Ignore a token. 173% 174\def\gobble#1{} 175 176% The following is used inside several \edef's. 177\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} 178 179% Hyphenation fixes. 180\hyphenation{ 181 Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script 182 ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps 183 data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script 184 man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm 185 par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces 186 spell-ing spell-ings 187 stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space 188 wide-spread wrap-around 189} 190 191% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file 192% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, 193% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make 194% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log 195% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX. 196% 197\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% 198\def\loggingall{% 199 \tracingstats2 200 \tracingpages1 201 \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex 202 \tracingparagraphs1 203 \tracingoutput1 204 \tracingmacros2 205 \tracingrestores1 206 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen 207 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined\else % etex gives us more logging 208 \tracingscantokens1 209 \tracingifs1 210 \tracinggroups1 211 \tracingnesting2 212 \tracingassigns1 213 \fi 214 \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex 215 \errorcontextlines16 216}% 217 218% @errormsg{MSG}. Do the index-like expansions on MSG, but if things 219% aren't perfect, it's not the end of the world, being an error message, 220% after all. 221% 222\def\errormsg{\begingroup \indexnofonts \doerrormsg} 223\def\doerrormsg#1{\errmessage{#1}} 224 225% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing 226% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space. 227% 228\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount 229 \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi} 230\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount 231 \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi} 232\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount 233 \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi} 234 235% Output routine 236% 237 238% For a final copy, take out the rectangles 239% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided 240% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). 241% 242\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt } 243 244\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines 245\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in 246 247% Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor. 248% We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark. 249% This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark. 250% 251% A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct. 252% \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase. 253% 254% Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter 255% (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top 256% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. 257 258% \domark is called twice inside \chapmacro, to add one 259% mark before the section break, and one after. 260% In the second call \prevchapterdefs is the same as \currentchapterdefs, 261% and \prevsectiondefs is the same as \currentsectiondefs. 262% Then if the page is not broken at the mark, some of the previous 263% section appears on the page, and we can get the name of this section 264% from \firstmark for @everyheadingmarks top. 265% @everyheadingmarks bottom uses \botmark. 266% 267% See page 260 of The TeXbook. 268\def\domark{% 269 \toks0=\expandafter{\currentchapterdefs}% 270 \toks2=\expandafter{\currentsectiondefs}% 271 \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}% 272 \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}% 273 \toks8=\expandafter{\currentcolordefs}% 274 \mark{% 275 \the\toks0 \the\toks2 % 0: marks for @everyheadingmarks top 276 \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6 % 1: for @everyheadingmarks bottom 277 \noexpand\else \the\toks8 % 2: color marks 278 }% 279} 280 281% \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks, 282% \getcolormarks - extract needed part of mark. 283% 284% \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title 285% page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us 286% the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g., 287% @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very 288% first @chapter. 289\def\gettopheadingmarks{% 290 \ifcase0\the\savedtopmark\fi 291 \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi 292} 293\def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi} 294\def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\the\savedtopmark\fi} 295 296% Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors. 297\def\currentchapterdefs{} 298\def\currentsectiondefs{} 299\def\currentsection{} 300\def\prevchapterdefs{} 301\def\prevsectiondefs{} 302\def\currentcolordefs{} 303 304% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. 305\newdimen\bindingoffset 306\newdimen\normaloffset 307\newdimen\txipagewidth \newdimen\txipageheight 308 309% Main output routine. 310% 311\chardef\PAGE = 255 312\newtoks\defaultoutput 313\defaultoutput = {\savetopmark\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} 314\output=\expandafter{\the\defaultoutput} 315 316\newbox\headlinebox 317\newbox\footlinebox 318 319% When outputting the double column layout for indices, an output routine 320% is run several times, which hides the original value of \topmark. This 321% can lead to a page heading being output and duplicating the chapter heading 322% of the index. Hence, save the contents of \topmark at the beginning of 323% the output routine. The saved contents are valid until we actually 324% \shipout a page. 325% 326% (We used to run a short output routine to actually set \topmark and 327% \firstmark to the right values, but if this was called with an empty page 328% containing whatsits for writing index entries, the whatsits would be thrown 329% away and the index auxiliary file would remain empty.) 330% 331\newtoks\savedtopmark 332\newif\iftopmarksaved 333\topmarksavedtrue 334\def\savetopmark{% 335 \iftopmarksaved\else 336 \global\savedtopmark=\expandafter{\topmark}% 337 \global\topmarksavedtrue 338 \fi 339} 340 341% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. 342% \shipout a vbox for a single page, adding an optional header, footer 343% and footnote. This also causes index entries for this page to be written 344% to the auxiliary files. 345% 346\def\onepageout#1{% 347 \hoffset=\normaloffset 348 % 349 \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset 350 \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi 351 % 352 \checkchapterpage 353 % 354 % Retrieve the information for the headings from the marks in the page, 355 % and call Plain TeX's \makeheadline and \makefootline, which use the 356 % values in \headline and \footline. 357 % 358 % Common context changes for both heading and footing. 359 % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in 360 % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). 361 \def\commonheadfootline{\let\hsize=\txipagewidth \texinfochars} 362 % 363 \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi 364 \global\setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\commonheadfootline \makeheadline}% 365 \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi 366 \global\setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\commonheadfootline \makefootline}% 367 % 368 {% 369 % Set context for writing to auxiliary files like index files. 370 % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to 371 % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends 372 % before the \shipout runs. 373 % 374 \atdummies % don't expand commands in the output. 375 \turnoffactive 376 \shipout\vbox{% 377 % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page. 378 \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi 379 % 380 \unvbox\headlinebox 381 \pagebody{#1}% 382 \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt 383 % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. 384 % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.) 385 % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. 386 \vskip 24pt 387 \unvbox\footlinebox 388 \fi 389 % 390 }% 391 }% 392 \global\topmarksavedfalse 393 \advancepageno 394 \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi 395} 396 397\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen 398 399% Main part of page, including any footnotes 400\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\txipageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} 401{\catcode`\@ =11 402\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi 403% marginal hacks, [email protected] (Juha Takala) 404\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present 405 \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi 406\dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax 407\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi 408\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} 409} 410 411% Check if we are on the first page of a chapter. Used for printing headings. 412\newif\ifchapterpage 413\def\checkchapterpage{% 414 % Get the chapter that was current at the end of the last page 415 \ifcase1\the\savedtopmark\fi 416 \let\prevchaptername\thischaptername 417 % 418 \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi 419 \let\curchaptername\thischaptername 420 % 421 \ifx\curchaptername\prevchaptername 422 \chapterpagefalse 423 \else 424 \chapterpagetrue 425 \fi 426} 427 428% Argument parsing 429 430% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of 431% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a 432% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. 433% For example, \def\foo{\parsearg\fooxxx}. 434% 435\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}} 436\def\parseargusing#1#2{% 437 \def\argtorun{#2}% 438 \begingroup 439 \obeylines 440 \spaceisspace 441 #1% 442 \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below. 443} 444 445{\obeylines % 446 \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% 447 \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. 448 \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm% 449 }% 450} 451 452% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. Pass the result on to 453% \argcheckspaces. 454\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm} 455\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm} 456 457% Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space. 458% 459% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g., 460% @end itemize @c foo 461% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed 462% by \finishparsearg. 463% 464\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M} 465\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M} 466\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{% 467 \def\temp{#3}% 468 \ifx\temp\empty 469 % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp: 470 \let\temp\finishparsearg 471 \else 472 \let\temp\argcheckspaces 473 \fi 474 % Put the space token in: 475 \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm 476} 477 478% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so 479% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation. 480% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now, 481% just before passing the control to \argtorun. 482% (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is 483% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger 484% that a pair of braces would be stripped. 485% 486% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token. 487% 488\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}} 489 490 491% \parseargdef - define a command taking an argument on the line 492% 493% \parseargdef\foo{...} 494% is roughly equivalent to 495% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo} 496% \def\Xfoo#1{...} 497\def\parseargdef#1{% 498 \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1% 499} 500\def\doparseargdef#1#2{% 501 \def#2{\parsearg#1}% 502 \def#1##1% 503} 504 505% Several utility definitions with active space: 506{ 507 \obeyspaces 508 \gdef\obeyedspace{ } 509 510 % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword 511 % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this 512 % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input 513 % should produce a line of output anyway. 514 % 515 \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie} 516 517 % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces 518 % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the 519 % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). 520 \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space} 521} 522 523 524\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} 525 526% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this: 527% 528% \envdef\foo{...} 529% \def\Efoo{...} 530% 531% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the 532% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also 533% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks 534% whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be 535% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected. 536% 537% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they 538% are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The 539% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this 540% special case.) 541 542 543% At run-time, environments start with this: 544\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}} 545% initialize 546\let\thisenv\empty 547 548% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'': 549\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 550\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 551 552% Check whether we're in the right environment: 553\def\checkenv#1{% 554 \def\temp{#1}% 555 \ifx\thisenv\temp 556 \else 557 \badenverr 558 \fi 559} 560 561% Environment mismatch, #1 expected: 562\def\badenverr{% 563 \errhelp = \EMsimple 564 \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp, 565 not \inenvironment\thisenv}% 566} 567\def\inenvironment#1{% 568 \ifx#1\empty 569 outside of any environment% 570 \else 571 in environment \expandafter\string#1% 572 \fi 573} 574 575 576% @end foo calls \checkenv and executes the definition of \Efoo. 577\parseargdef\end{% 578 \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname 579 \else 580 % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal. 581 \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname 582 \csname E#1\endcsname 583 \endgroup 584 \fi 585} 586 587\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} 588 589 590% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space 591% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space 592% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and 593% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the 594% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. 595{\catcode`@ = 11 596 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble 597 % if the definition is written into an index file. 598 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M 599 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } 600} 601 602% @: forces normal size whitespace following. 603\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } 604 605% @* forces a line break. 606\def\*{\unskip\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} 607 608% @/ allows a line break. 609\let\/=\allowbreak 610 611% @. is an end-of-sentence period. 612\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 613 614% @! is an end-of-sentence bang. 615\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 616 617% @? is an end-of-sentence query. 618\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 619 620% @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation. 621% 622\def\onword{on} 623\def\offword{off} 624% 625\parseargdef\frenchspacing{% 626 \def\temp{#1}% 627 \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing 628 \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing 629 \else 630 \errhelp = \EMsimple 631 \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on|off}% 632 \fi\fi 633} 634 635% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the 636% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would 637% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. 638\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} 639 640% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing 641% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box 642% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for 643% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is 644% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large, 645% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and 646% the text is small, which looks bad. 647% 648% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can 649% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it 650% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an 651% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The 652% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit 653% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex). 654% 655\newbox\groupbox 656\def\vfilllimit{0.7} 657% 658\envdef\group{% 659 \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else 660 \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp 661 \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% 662 \fi 663 \startsavinginserts 664 % 665 \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup 666 % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as 667 % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an 668 % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after 669 % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group 670 % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo 671 % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. 672 \comment 673} 674% 675% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts 676% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done) 677% \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space 678% above. But it's pretty close. 679\def\Egroup{% 680 % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group 681 % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth. 682 \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar. 683 \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth 684 \egroup % End the \vtop. 685 \addgroupbox 686 \prevdepth = \dimen1 687 \checkinserts 688} 689 690\def\addgroupbox{ 691 % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box. 692 \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox 693 % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less). 694 \dimen2 = \txipageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal 695 % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big 696 % group, force a page break. 697 \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2 698 \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\txipageheight 699 \page 700 \fi 701 \fi 702 \box\groupbox 703} 704 705% 706% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help 707% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. 708% 709\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% 710group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% 711where each line of input produces a line of output.} 712 713% @need space-in-mils 714% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. 715 716\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in 717 718\parseargdef\need{% 719 % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a 720 % paragraph. 721 \par 722 % 723 % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless. 724 \dimen0 = #1\mil 725 \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox 726 \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox 727 \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2 728 % 729 % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the 730 % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line. 731 % And a page break here is fine. 732 \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}% 733 % 734 % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the 735 % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the 736 % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider 737 % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the 738 % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. 739 % 740 % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the 741 % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in 742 % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which 743 % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing 744 % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an 745 % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real 746 % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. 747 \penalty9999 748 % 749 % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. 750 \kern -#1\mil 751 % 752 % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. 753 \nobreak 754 \fi 755} 756 757% @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented). 758 759\let\br = \par 760 761% @page forces the start of a new page. 762% 763\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} 764 765% @exdent text.... 766% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin 767 768% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. 769% That's how much \exdent should take out. 770\newskip\exdentamount 771 772% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. 773\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break} 774 775% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. 776\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount 777 \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} 778 779% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current 780% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion 781% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. Not documented, written for gawk manual. 782% 783\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm 784\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} 785% 786\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{% 787 \nobreak 788 \kern-\strutdepth 789 \vtop to \strutdepth{% 790 \baselineskip=\strutdepth 791 \vss 792 % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to 793 % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size. 794 \ifx#1l% 795 \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}% 796 \else 797 \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}% 798 \fi 799 \null 800 }% 801}} 802\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l} 803\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r} 804% 805% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]} 806% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right; 807% else use TEXT for both). 808% 809\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish} 810\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing. 811 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 812 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 813 \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts 814 \def\righttext{#2}% 815 \else 816 \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text 817 \def\righttext{#1}% 818 \fi 819 % 820 \ifodd\pageno 821 \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin 822 \else 823 \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}% 824 \fi 825 \temp 826} 827 828% @include FILE -- \input text of FILE. 829% 830\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz} 831\def\includezzz#1{% 832 \pushthisfilestack 833 \def\thisfile{#1}% 834 {% 835 \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE. 836 \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion 837 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. 838 \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @include of #1^^J}% 839 \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }% 840 % 841 % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes 842 % definitions, etc. 843 \expandafter 844 }\temp 845 \popthisfilestack 846} 847\def\filenamecatcodes{% 848 \catcode`\\=\other 849 \catcode`~=\other 850 \catcode`^=\other 851 \catcode`_=\other 852 \catcode`|=\other 853 \catcode`<=\other 854 \catcode`>=\other 855 \catcode`+=\other 856 \catcode`-=\other 857 \catcode`\`=\other 858 \catcode`\'=\other 859} 860 861\def\pushthisfilestack{% 862 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm 863} 864\def\pushthisfilestackX{% 865 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm 866} 867\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {% 868 \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}% 869} 870 871\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty} 872\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error: 873 the stack of filenames is empty.}} 874% 875\def\thisfile{} 876 877% @center line 878% outputs that line, centered. 879% 880\parseargdef\center{% 881 \ifhmode 882 \let\centersub\centerH 883 \else 884 \let\centersub\centerV 885 \fi 886 \centersub{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}% 887 \let\centersub\relax % don't let the definition persist, just in case 888} 889\def\centerH#1{{% 890 \hfil\break 891 \advance\hsize by -\leftskip 892 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 893 \line{#1}% 894 \break 895}} 896% 897\newcount\centerpenalty 898\def\centerV#1{% 899 % The idea here is the same as in \startdefun, \cartouche, etc.: if 900 % @center is the first thing after a section heading, we need to wipe 901 % out the negative parskip inserted by \sectionheading, but still 902 % prevent a page break here. 903 \centerpenalty = \lastpenalty 904 \ifnum\centerpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \fi 905 \ifnum\centerpenalty>9999 \penalty\centerpenalty \fi 906 \line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}% 907} 908 909% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space 910% 911\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip} 912 913% @comment ...line which is ignored... 914% @c is the same as @comment 915% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment 916 917 918\def\c{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\active% 919\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% 920\cxxx} 921{\catcode`\^^M=\active \gdef\cxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} 922% 923\let\comment\c 924 925% @paragraphindent NCHARS 926% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough. 927% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'. 928% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though. 929% 930\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords 931\def\noneword{none} 932% 933\parseargdef\paragraphindent{% 934 \def\temp{#1}% 935 \ifx\temp\asisword 936 \else 937 \ifx\temp\noneword 938 \defaultparindent = 0pt 939 \else 940 \defaultparindent = #1em 941 \fi 942 \fi 943 \parindent = \defaultparindent 944} 945 946% @exampleindent NCHARS 947% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent. 948% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but 949% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent. 950\parseargdef\exampleindent{% 951 \def\temp{#1}% 952 \ifx\temp\asisword 953 \else 954 \ifx\temp\noneword 955 \lispnarrowing = 0pt 956 \else 957 \lispnarrowing = #1em 958 \fi 959 \fi 960} 961 962% @firstparagraphindent WORD 963% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph 964% after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such 965% paragraphs. 966% 967% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling 968% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do. 969% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD. 970% By default, we suppress indentation. 971% 972\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent} 973\def\insertword{insert} 974% 975\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{% 976 \def\temp{#1}% 977 \ifx\temp\noneword 978 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent 979 \else\ifx\temp\insertword 980 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax 981 \else 982 \errhelp = \EMsimple 983 \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}% 984 \fi\fi 985} 986 987% Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to 988% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty. 989% 990% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next 991% paragraph. 992% 993\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{% 994 \gdef\indent {\restorefirstparagraphindent \indent}% 995 \gdef\noindent{\restorefirstparagraphindent \noindent}% 996 \global\everypar = {\kern -\parindent \restorefirstparagraphindent}% 997} 998% 999\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{% 1000 \global\let\indent = \ptexindent 1001 \global\let\noindent = \ptexnoindent 1002 \global\everypar = {}% 1003} 1004 1005% leave vertical mode without cancelling any first paragraph indent 1006\gdef\imageindent{% 1007 \toks0=\everypar 1008 \everypar={}% 1009 \ptexnoindent 1010 \global\everypar=\toks0 1011} 1012 1013 1014% @refill is a no-op. 1015\let\refill=\relax 1016 1017% @setfilename INFO-FILENAME - ignored 1018\let\setfilename=\comment 1019 1020% @bye. 1021\outer\def\bye{\chappager\pagelabels\tracingstats=1\ptexend} 1022 1023 1024\message{pdf,} 1025% adobe `portable' document format 1026\newcount\tempnum 1027\newcount\lnkcount 1028\newtoks\filename 1029\newcount\filenamelength 1030\newcount\pgn 1031\newtoks\toksA 1032\newtoks\toksB 1033\newtoks\toksC 1034\newtoks\toksD 1035\newbox\boxA 1036\newbox\boxB 1037\newcount\countA 1038\newif\ifpdf 1039\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest 1040 1041% 1042% For LuaTeX 1043% 1044 1045\newif\iftxiuseunicodedestname 1046\txiuseunicodedestnamefalse % For pdfTeX etc. 1047 1048\ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 1049\else 1050 % Use Unicode destination names 1051 \txiuseunicodedestnametrue 1052 % Escape PDF strings with converting UTF-16 from UTF-8 1053 \begingroup 1054 \catcode`\%=12 1055 \directlua{ 1056 function UTF16oct(str) 1057 tex.sprint(string.char(0x5c) .. '376' .. string.char(0x5c) .. '377') 1058 for c in string.utfvalues(str) do 1059 if c < 0x10000 then 1060 tex.sprint( 1061 string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1062 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o', 1063 math.floor(c / 256), math.floor(c % 256))) 1064 else 1065 c = c - 0x10000 1066 local c_hi = c / 1024 + 0xd800 1067 local c_lo = c % 1024 + 0xdc00 1068 tex.sprint( 1069 string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1070 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1071 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1072 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o', 1073 math.floor(c_hi / 256), math.floor(c_hi % 256), 1074 math.floor(c_lo / 256), math.floor(c_lo % 256))) 1075 end 1076 end 1077 end 1078 } 1079 \endgroup 1080 \def\pdfescapestrutfsixteen#1{\directlua{UTF16oct('\luaescapestring{#1}')}} 1081 % Escape PDF strings without converting 1082 \begingroup 1083 \directlua{ 1084 function PDFescstr(str) 1085 for c in string.bytes(str) do 1086 if c <= 0x20 or c >= 0x80 or c == 0x28 or c == 0x29 or c == 0x5c then 1087 tex.sprint(-2, 1088 string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o', 1089 c)) 1090 else 1091 tex.sprint(-2, string.char(c)) 1092 end 1093 end 1094 end 1095 } 1096 % The -2 in the arguments here gives all the input to TeX catcode 12 1097 % (other) or 10 (space), preventing undefined control sequence errors. See 1098 % https://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/bug-texinfo/2019-08/msg00031.html 1099 % 1100 \endgroup 1101 \def\pdfescapestring#1{\directlua{PDFescstr('\luaescapestring{#1}')}} 1102 \ifnum\luatexversion>84 1103 % For LuaTeX >= 0.85 1104 \def\pdfdest{\pdfextension dest} 1105 \let\pdfoutput\outputmode 1106 \def\pdfliteral{\pdfextension literal} 1107 \def\pdfcatalog{\pdfextension catalog} 1108 \def\pdftexversion{\numexpr\pdffeedback version\relax} 1109 \let\pdfximage\saveimageresource 1110 \let\pdfrefximage\useimageresource 1111 \let\pdflastximage\lastsavedimageresourceindex 1112 \def\pdfendlink{\pdfextension endlink\relax} 1113 \def\pdfoutline{\pdfextension outline} 1114 \def\pdfstartlink{\pdfextension startlink} 1115 \def\pdffontattr{\pdfextension fontattr} 1116 \def\pdfobj{\pdfextension obj} 1117 \def\pdflastobj{\numexpr\pdffeedback lastobj\relax} 1118 \let\pdfpagewidth\pagewidth 1119 \let\pdfpageheight\pageheight 1120 \edef\pdfhorigin{\pdfvariable horigin} 1121 \edef\pdfvorigin{\pdfvariable vorigin} 1122 \fi 1123\fi 1124 1125% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1 1126% can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as being undefined. 1127\ifx\pdfoutput\thisisundefined 1128\else 1129 \ifx\pdfoutput\relax 1130 \else 1131 \ifcase\pdfoutput 1132 \else 1133 \pdftrue 1134 \fi 1135 \fi 1136\fi 1137 1138\newif\ifpdforxetex 1139\pdforxetexfalse 1140\ifpdf 1141 \pdforxetextrue 1142\fi 1143\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined\else 1144 \pdforxetextrue 1145\fi 1146 1147 1148% Output page labels information. 1149% See PDF reference v.1.7 p.594, section 8.3.1. 1150\ifpdf 1151\def\pagelabels{% 1152 \def\title{0 << /P (T-) /S /D >>}% 1153 \edef\roman{\the\romancount << /S /r >>}% 1154 \edef\arabic{\the\arabiccount << /S /D >>}% 1155 % 1156 % Page label ranges must be increasing. Remove any duplicates. 1157 % (There is a slight chance of this being wrong if e.g. there is 1158 % a @contents but no @titlepage, etc.) 1159 % 1160 \ifnum\romancount=0 \def\roman{}\fi 1161 \ifnum\arabiccount=0 \def\title{}% 1162 \else 1163 \ifnum\romancount=\arabiccount \def\roman{}\fi 1164 \fi 1165 % 1166 \ifnum\romancount<\arabiccount 1167 \pdfcatalog{/PageLabels << /Nums [\title \roman \arabic ] >> }\relax 1168 \else 1169 \pdfcatalog{/PageLabels << /Nums [\title \arabic \roman ] >> }\relax 1170 \fi 1171} 1172\else 1173 \let\pagelabels\relax 1174\fi 1175 1176\newcount\pagecount \pagecount=0 1177\newcount\romancount \romancount=0 1178\newcount\arabiccount \arabiccount=0 1179\ifpdf 1180 \let\ptxadvancepageno\advancepageno 1181 \def\advancepageno{% 1182 \ptxadvancepageno\global\advance\pagecount by 1 1183 } 1184\fi 1185 1186 1187% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets, 1188% for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to 1189% double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be 1190% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good. 1191% 1192% See http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html and 1193% related messages. The final outcome is that it is up to the TeX user 1194% to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so 1195% that's what we do. pdftex 1.30.0 (ca.2005) introduced a primitive to 1196% do this reliably, so we use it. 1197 1198% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements, 1199% which we \xdef. 1200\def\txiescapepdf#1{% 1201 \ifx\pdfescapestring\thisisundefined 1202 % No primitive available; should we give a warning or log? 1203 % Many times it won't matter. 1204 \xdef#1{#1}% 1205 \else 1206 % The expandable \pdfescapestring primitive escapes parentheses, 1207 % backslashes, and other special chars. 1208 \xdef#1{\pdfescapestring{#1}}% 1209 \fi 1210} 1211\def\txiescapepdfutfsixteen#1{% 1212 \ifx\pdfescapestrutfsixteen\thisisundefined 1213 % No UTF-16 converting macro available. 1214 \txiescapepdf{#1}% 1215 \else 1216 \xdef#1{\pdfescapestrutfsixteen{#1}}% 1217 \fi 1218} 1219 1220\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images 1221with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot 1222be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI 1223output) for that.)} 1224 1225\ifpdf 1226 % 1227 % Color manipulation macros using ideas from pdfcolor.tex, 1228 % except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a 1229 % very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead 1230 % of actual black. The dark red here is dark enough to print on paper as 1231 % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing. We use 1232 % black by default, though. 1233 \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12} 1234 \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0} 1235 % 1236 % rg sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.); 1237 % RG sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s). 1238 \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg #1 RG}} 1239 % 1240 % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, 1241 % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. 1242 \def\setcolor#1{% 1243 \xdef\currentcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% 1244 \domark 1245 \pdfsetcolor{#1}% 1246 } 1247 % 1248 \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack} 1249 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} 1250 \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} 1251 \def\currentcolordefs{} 1252 % 1253 \def\makefootline{% 1254 \baselineskip24pt 1255 \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% 1256 } 1257 % 1258 \def\makeheadline{% 1259 \vbox to 0pt{% 1260 \vskip-22.5pt 1261 \line{% 1262 \vbox to8.5pt{}% 1263 % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. 1264 \getcolormarks 1265 % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. 1266 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% 1267 }% 1268 \vss 1269 }% 1270 \nointerlineskip 1271 } 1272 % 1273 % 1274 \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines} 1275 % 1276 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). 1277 \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% 1278 \def\pdfimagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 1279 \def\pdfimageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 1280 % 1281 % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among 1282 % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if 1283 % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a 1284 % bitmap. 1285 \let\pdfimgext=\empty 1286 \begingroup 1287 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 1288 \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1 1289 \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 1290 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 1291 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 1292 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 1293 \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp 1294 \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}% 1295 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}% 1296 \fi 1297 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}% 1298 \fi 1299 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}% 1300 \fi 1301 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}% 1302 \fi 1303 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}% 1304 \fi 1305 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}% 1306 \fi 1307 \closein 1 1308 \endgroup 1309 % 1310 % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is 1311 % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.) 1312 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1313 \immediate\pdfimage 1314 \else 1315 \immediate\pdfximage 1316 \fi 1317 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \pdfimagewidth \fi 1318 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \pdfimageheight \fi 1319 \ifnum\pdftexversion<13 1320 #1.\pdfimgext 1321 \else 1322 {#1.\pdfimgext}% 1323 \fi 1324 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else 1325 \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage 1326 \fi} 1327 % 1328 \def\setpdfdestname#1{{% 1329 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters 1330 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. 1331 \indexnofonts 1332 \makevalueexpandable 1333 \turnoffactive 1334 \iftxiuseunicodedestname 1335 \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 1336 % Pass through Latin-1 characters. 1337 % LuaTeX with byte wise I/O converts Latin-1 characters to Unicode. 1338 \else 1339 \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 1340 % Pass through Unicode characters. 1341 \else 1342 % Use ASCII approximations in destination names. 1343 \passthroughcharsfalse 1344 \fi 1345 \fi 1346 \else 1347 % Use ASCII approximations in destination names. 1348 \passthroughcharsfalse 1349 \fi 1350 \def\pdfdestname{#1}% 1351 \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname 1352 }} 1353 % 1354 \def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{% 1355 \indexnofonts 1356 \makevalueexpandable 1357 \turnoffactive 1358 \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 1359 % The PDF format can use an extended form of Latin-1 in bookmark 1360 % strings. See Appendix D of the PDF Reference, Sixth Edition, for 1361 % the "PDFDocEncoding". 1362 \passthroughcharstrue 1363 % Pass through Latin-1 characters. 1364 % LuaTeX: Convert to Unicode 1365 % pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding 1366 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1367 \else 1368 \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 1369 \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 1370 % For pdfTeX with UTF-8. 1371 % TODO: the PDF format can use UTF-16 in bookmark strings, 1372 % but the code for this isn't done yet. 1373 % Use ASCII approximations. 1374 \passthroughcharsfalse 1375 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1376 \else 1377 % For LuaTeX with UTF-8. 1378 % Pass through Unicode characters for title texts. 1379 \passthroughcharstrue 1380 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1381 \fi 1382 \else 1383 % For non-Latin-1 or non-UTF-8 encodings. 1384 % Use ASCII approximations. 1385 \passthroughcharsfalse 1386 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1387 \fi 1388 \fi 1389 % LuaTeX: Convert to UTF-16 1390 % pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding 1391 \txiescapepdfutfsixteen\pdfoutlinetext 1392 }} 1393 % 1394 \def\pdfmkdest#1{% 1395 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 1396 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% 1397 } 1398 % 1399 % used to mark target names; must be expandable. 1400 \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1} 1401 % 1402 % by default, use black for everything. 1403 \def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack} 1404 \def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack} 1405 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} 1406 % 1407 % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines 1408 % come from Petr Olsak 1409 \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% 1410 \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi} 1411 \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax 1412 \advance\tempnum by 1 1413 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} 1414 % 1415 % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the 1416 % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number 1417 % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text, 1418 % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node. 1419 % #4 is the page number 1420 % 1421 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% 1422 % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the 1423 % page number. We could generate a destination for the section 1424 % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't 1425 % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured. 1426 \setpdfoutlinetext{#1} 1427 \setpdfdestname{#3} 1428 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 1429 \def\pdfdestname{#4}% 1430 \fi 1431 % 1432 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfdestname}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}% 1433 } 1434 % 1435 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% 1436 \begingroup 1437 % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline. 1438 \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines 1439 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1440 \def\thischapnum{##2}% 1441 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1442 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1443 }% 1444 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1445 \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}% 1446 \def\thissecnum{##2}% 1447 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1448 }% 1449 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1450 \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}% 1451 \def\thissubsecnum{##2}% 1452 }% 1453 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1454 \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}% 1455 }% 1456 \def\thischapnum{0}% 1457 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1458 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1459 % 1460 % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et 1461 % al. a second time, below. 1462 \def\appentry{\numchapentry}% 1463 \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1464 \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1465 \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1466 \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}% 1467 \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1468 \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1469 \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1470 \readdatafile{toc}% 1471 % 1472 % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines. 1473 % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of 1474 % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above. 1475 % 1476 % We use the node names as the destinations. 1477 % 1478 % Currently we prefix the section name with the section number 1479 % for chapter and appendix headings only in order to avoid too much 1480 % horizontal space being required in the PDF viewer. 1481 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1482 \dopdfoutline{##2 ##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1483 \def\unnchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1484 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1485 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1486 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1487 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1488 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1489 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero 1490 \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}% 1491 % 1492 % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of 1493 % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters, 1494 % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from 1495 % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from 1496 % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100. 1497 % 1498 % TODO this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to 1499 % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Too 1500 % much work for too little return. Just use the ASCII equivalents 1501 % we use for the index sort strings. 1502 % 1503 \indexnofonts 1504 \setupdatafile 1505 % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike 1506 % Texinfo index files. So set that up. 1507 \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}% 1508 \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}% 1509 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash 1510 \input \tocreadfilename 1511 \endgroup 1512 } 1513 {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2 1514 \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other 1515 \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]% 1516 \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]% 1517 ] 1518 % 1519 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% 1520 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax 1521 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces 1522 \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% 1523 \advance\filenamelength by 1 1524 \fi 1525 \nextsp} 1526 \def\getfilename#1{% 1527 \filenamelength=0 1528 % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get 1529 % snagged on things like "@value{foo}". 1530 \edef\temp{#1}% 1531 \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax 1532 } 1533 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1534 \let \startlink \pdfannotlink 1535 \else 1536 \let \startlink \pdfstartlink 1537 \fi 1538 % make a live url in pdf output. 1539 \def\pdfurl#1{% 1540 \begingroup 1541 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not 1542 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context 1543 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one 1544 % people have actually reported a problem with. 1545 % 1546 \normalturnoffactive 1547 \def\@{@}% 1548 \let\/=\empty 1549 \makevalueexpandable 1550 % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just 1551 % special-casing \var here? 1552 \def\var##1{##1}% 1553 % 1554 \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% 1555 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 1556 user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% 1557 \endgroup} 1558 % \pdfgettoks - Surround page numbers in #1 with @pdflink. #1 may 1559 % be a simple number, or a list of numbers in the case of an index 1560 % entry. 1561 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} 1562 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} 1563 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} 1564 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} 1565 \def\maketoks{% 1566 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax 1567 \ifx\first0\adn0 1568 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 1569 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 1570 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 1571 \else 1572 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi 1573 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else 1574 \let\next=\maketoks 1575 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} 1576 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi 1577 \fi 1578 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 1579 \next} 1580 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% 1581 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} 1582 \def\pdflink#1{% 1583 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}} 1584 \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} 1585 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} 1586\else 1587 % non-pdf mode 1588 \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble 1589 \let\pdfurl = \gobble 1590 \let\endlink = \relax 1591 \let\setcolor = \gobble 1592 \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble 1593 \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax 1594\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput 1595 1596% 1597% For XeTeX 1598% 1599\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 1600\else 1601 % 1602 % XeTeX version check 1603 % 1604 \ifnum\strcmp{\the\XeTeXversion\XeTeXrevision}{0.99996}>-1 1605 % TeX Live 2016 contains XeTeX 0.99996 and xdvipdfmx 20160307. 1606 % It can use the `dvipdfmx:config' special (from TeX Live SVN r40941). 1607 % For avoiding PDF destination name replacement, we use this special 1608 % instead of xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010'. 1609 \special{dvipdfmx:config C 0x0010} 1610 % XeTeX 0.99995+ comes with xdvipdfmx 20160307+. 1611 % It can handle Unicode destination names for PDF. 1612 \txiuseunicodedestnametrue 1613 \else 1614 % XeTeX < 0.99996 (TeX Live < 2016) cannot use the 1615 % `dvipdfmx:config' special. 1616 % So for avoiding PDF destination name replacement, 1617 % xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010' is necessary. 1618 % 1619 % XeTeX < 0.99995 can not handle Unicode destination names for PDF 1620 % because xdvipdfmx 20150315 has a UTF-16 conversion issue. 1621 % It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753). 1622 \txiuseunicodedestnamefalse 1623 \fi 1624 % 1625 % Color support 1626 % 1627 \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12} 1628 \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0} 1629 % 1630 \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\special{pdf:scolor [#1]}} 1631 % 1632 % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, 1633 % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. 1634 \def\setcolor#1{% 1635 \xdef\currentcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% 1636 \domark 1637 \pdfsetcolor{#1}% 1638 } 1639 % 1640 \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack} 1641 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} 1642 \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} 1643 \def\currentcolordefs{} 1644 % 1645 \def\makefootline{% 1646 \baselineskip24pt 1647 \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% 1648 } 1649 % 1650 \def\makeheadline{% 1651 \vbox to 0pt{% 1652 \vskip-22.5pt 1653 \line{% 1654 \vbox to8.5pt{}% 1655 % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. 1656 \getcolormarks 1657 % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. 1658 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% 1659 }% 1660 \vss 1661 }% 1662 \nointerlineskip 1663 } 1664 % 1665 % PDF outline support 1666 % 1667 % Emulate pdfTeX primitive 1668 \def\pdfdest name#1 xyz{% 1669 \special{pdf:dest (#1) [@thispage /XYZ @xpos @ypos null]}% 1670 } 1671 % 1672 \def\setpdfdestname#1{{% 1673 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters 1674 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. 1675 \indexnofonts 1676 \makevalueexpandable 1677 \turnoffactive 1678 \iftxiuseunicodedestname 1679 % Pass through Unicode characters. 1680 \else 1681 % Use ASCII approximations in destination names. 1682 \passthroughcharsfalse 1683 \fi 1684 \def\pdfdestname{#1}% 1685 \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname 1686 }} 1687 % 1688 \def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{% 1689 \turnoffactive 1690 % Always use Unicode characters in title texts. 1691 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1692 % For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts to UTF-16. 1693 % So we do not convert. 1694 \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinetext 1695 }} 1696 % 1697 \def\pdfmkdest#1{% 1698 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 1699 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% 1700 } 1701 % 1702 % by default, use black for everything. 1703 \def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack} 1704 \def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack} 1705 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} 1706 % 1707 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% 1708 \setpdfoutlinetext{#1} 1709 \setpdfdestname{#3} 1710 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 1711 \def\pdfdestname{#4}% 1712 \fi 1713 % 1714 \special{pdf:out [-] #2 << /Title (\pdfoutlinetext) /A 1715 << /S /GoTo /D (\pdfdestname) >> >> }% 1716 } 1717 % 1718 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% 1719 \begingroup 1720 % 1721 % For XeTeX, counts of subentries are not necessary. 1722 % Therefore, we read toc only once. 1723 % 1724 % We use node names as destinations. 1725 % 1726 % Currently we prefix the section name with the section number 1727 % for chapter and appendix headings only in order to avoid too much 1728 % horizontal space being required in the PDF viewer. 1729 \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines 1730 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1731 \dopdfoutline{##2 ##1}{1}{##3}{##4}}% 1732 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1733 \dopdfoutline{##1}{2}{##3}{##4}}% 1734 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1735 \dopdfoutline{##1}{3}{##3}{##4}}% 1736 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1737 \dopdfoutline{##1}{4}{##3}{##4}}% 1738 % 1739 \let\appentry\numchapentry% 1740 \let\appsecentry\numsecentry% 1741 \let\appsubsecentry\numsubsecentry% 1742 \let\appsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry% 1743 \def\unnchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1744 \dopdfoutline{##1}{1}{##3}{##4}}% 1745 \let\unnsecentry\numsecentry% 1746 \let\unnsubsecentry\numsubsecentry% 1747 \let\unnsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry% 1748 % 1749 % For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts strings to UTF-16. 1750 % Therefore, the encoding and the language may not be considered. 1751 % 1752 \indexnofonts 1753 \setupdatafile 1754 % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike 1755 % Texinfo index files. So set that up. 1756 \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}% 1757 \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}% 1758 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash 1759 \input \tocreadfilename 1760 \endgroup 1761 } 1762 {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2 1763 \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other 1764 \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]% 1765 \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]% 1766 ] 1767 1768 \special{pdf:docview << /PageMode /UseOutlines >> } 1769 % ``\special{pdf:tounicode ...}'' is not necessary 1770 % because xdvipdfmx converts strings from UTF-8 to UTF-16 without it. 1771 % However, due to a UTF-16 conversion issue of xdvipdfmx 20150315, 1772 % ``\special{pdf:dest ...}'' cannot handle non-ASCII strings. 1773 % It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753). 1774% 1775 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% 1776 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax 1777 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces 1778 \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% 1779 \advance\filenamelength by 1 1780 \fi 1781 \nextsp} 1782 \def\getfilename#1{% 1783 \filenamelength=0 1784 % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get 1785 % snagged on things like "@value{foo}". 1786 \edef\temp{#1}% 1787 \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax 1788 } 1789 % make a live url in pdf output. 1790 \def\pdfurl#1{% 1791 \begingroup 1792 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not 1793 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context 1794 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one 1795 % people have actually reported a problem with. 1796 % 1797 \normalturnoffactive 1798 \def\@{@}% 1799 \let\/=\empty 1800 \makevalueexpandable 1801 % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just 1802 % special-casing \var here? 1803 \def\var##1{##1}% 1804 % 1805 \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% 1806 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] 1807 /Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >> >>}% 1808 \endgroup} 1809 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\special{pdf:eann}} 1810 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} 1811 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} 1812 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} 1813 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} 1814 \def\maketoks{% 1815 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax 1816 \ifx\first0\adn0 1817 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 1818 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 1819 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 1820 \else 1821 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi 1822 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else 1823 \let\next=\maketoks 1824 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} 1825 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi 1826 \fi 1827 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 1828 \next} 1829 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% 1830 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} 1831 \def\pdflink#1{% 1832 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] 1833 /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A << /S /GoTo /D (#1) >> >>}% 1834 \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} 1835 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} 1836% 1837 % 1838 % @image support 1839 % 1840 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). 1841 \def\doxeteximage#1#2#3{% 1842 \def\xeteximagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 1843 \def\xeteximageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 1844 % 1845 % XeTeX (and the PDF format) supports .pdf, .png, .jpg (among 1846 % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if 1847 % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a 1848 % bitmap. 1849 \let\xeteximgext=\empty 1850 \begingroup 1851 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 1852 \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1 1853 \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 1854 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 1855 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 1856 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 1857 \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for XeTeX}% 1858 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{JPG}% 1859 \fi 1860 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpeg}% 1861 \fi 1862 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpg}% 1863 \fi 1864 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{png}% 1865 \fi 1866 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{PDF}% 1867 \fi 1868 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{pdf}% 1869 \fi 1870 \closein 1 1871 \endgroup 1872 % 1873 % Putting an \hbox around the image can prevent an over-long line 1874 % after the image. 1875 \hbox\bgroup 1876 \def\xetexpdfext{pdf}% 1877 \ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext 1878 \XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext "" 1879 \else 1880 \def\xetexpdfext{PDF}% 1881 \ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext 1882 \XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext "" 1883 \else 1884 \XeTeXpicfile "#1".\xeteximgext "" 1885 \fi 1886 \fi 1887 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \xeteximagewidth \fi 1888 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \xeteximageheight \fi \relax 1889 \egroup 1890 } 1891\fi 1892 1893 1894% 1895\message{fonts,} 1896 1897% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size 1898% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers 1899% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. 1900% 1901\def\lineskipfactor{.08333} 1902\def\strutheightpercent{.70833} 1903\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} 1904% 1905% can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this. 1906\def\baselinefactor{1} 1907% 1908\newdimen\textleading 1909\def\setleading#1{% 1910 \dimen0 = #1\relax 1911 \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0 1912 \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip 1913 \normalbaselines 1914 \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% 1915 \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip 1916 depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip 1917 }% 1918} 1919 1920% PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap. 1921% 1922% do nothing with this by default. 1923\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble 1924\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble 1925\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble 1926 1927% if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps. 1928% (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run 1929% older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.) 1930\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\thisisundefined \else 1931 \begingroup 1932 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1933 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1934%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1935%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1936%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0) 1937%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0) 1938%%Version: 1.000 1939%%EndComments 1940/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 194112 dict begin 1942begincmap 1943/CIDSystemInfo 1944<< /Registry (TeX) 1945/Ordering (OT1) 1946/Supplement 0 1947>> def 1948/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def 1949/CMapType 2 def 19501 begincodespacerange 1951<00> <7F> 1952endcodespacerange 19538 beginbfrange 1954<00> <01> <0393> 1955<09> <0A> <03A8> 1956<23> <26> <0023> 1957<28> <3B> <0028> 1958<3F> <5B> <003F> 1959<5D> <5E> <005D> 1960<61> <7A> <0061> 1961<7B> <7C> <2013> 1962endbfrange 196340 beginbfchar 1964<02> <0398> 1965<03> <039B> 1966<04> <039E> 1967<05> <03A0> 1968<06> <03A3> 1969<07> <03D2> 1970<08> <03A6> 1971<0B> <00660066> 1972<0C> <00660069> 1973<0D> <0066006C> 1974<0E> <006600660069> 1975<0F> <00660066006C> 1976<10> <0131> 1977<11> <0237> 1978<12> <0060> 1979<13> <00B4> 1980<14> <02C7> 1981<15> <02D8> 1982<16> <00AF> 1983<17> <02DA> 1984<18> <00B8> 1985<19> <00DF> 1986<1A> <00E6> 1987<1B> <0153> 1988<1C> <00F8> 1989<1D> <00C6> 1990<1E> <0152> 1991<1F> <00D8> 1992<21> <0021> 1993<22> <201D> 1994<27> <2019> 1995<3C> <00A1> 1996<3D> <003D> 1997<3E> <00BF> 1998<5C> <201C> 1999<5F> <02D9> 2000<60> <2018> 2001<7D> <02DD> 2002<7E> <007E> 2003<7F> <00A8> 2004endbfchar 2005endcmap 2006CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 2007end 2008end 2009%%EndResource 2010%%EOF 2011 }\endgroup 2012 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{% 2013 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 2014 }% 2015% 2016% \cmapOT1IT 2017 \begingroup 2018 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 2019 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 2020%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 2021%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 2022%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0) 2023%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0) 2024%%Version: 1.000 2025%%EndComments 2026/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 202712 dict begin 2028begincmap 2029/CIDSystemInfo 2030<< /Registry (TeX) 2031/Ordering (OT1IT) 2032/Supplement 0 2033>> def 2034/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def 2035/CMapType 2 def 20361 begincodespacerange 2037<00> <7F> 2038endcodespacerange 20398 beginbfrange 2040<00> <01> <0393> 2041<09> <0A> <03A8> 2042<25> <26> <0025> 2043<28> <3B> <0028> 2044<3F> <5B> <003F> 2045<5D> <5E> <005D> 2046<61> <7A> <0061> 2047<7B> <7C> <2013> 2048endbfrange 204942 beginbfchar 2050<02> <0398> 2051<03> <039B> 2052<04> <039E> 2053<05> <03A0> 2054<06> <03A3> 2055<07> <03D2> 2056<08> <03A6> 2057<0B> <00660066> 2058<0C> <00660069> 2059<0D> <0066006C> 2060<0E> <006600660069> 2061<0F> <00660066006C> 2062<10> <0131> 2063<11> <0237> 2064<12> <0060> 2065<13> <00B4> 2066<14> <02C7> 2067<15> <02D8> 2068<16> <00AF> 2069<17> <02DA> 2070<18> <00B8> 2071<19> <00DF> 2072<1A> <00E6> 2073<1B> <0153> 2074<1C> <00F8> 2075<1D> <00C6> 2076<1E> <0152> 2077<1F> <00D8> 2078<21> <0021> 2079<22> <201D> 2080<23> <0023> 2081<24> <00A3> 2082<27> <2019> 2083<3C> <00A1> 2084<3D> <003D> 2085<3E> <00BF> 2086<5C> <201C> 2087<5F> <02D9> 2088<60> <2018> 2089<7D> <02DD> 2090<7E> <007E> 2091<7F> <00A8> 2092endbfchar 2093endcmap 2094CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 2095end 2096end 2097%%EndResource 2098%%EOF 2099 }\endgroup 2100 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{% 2101 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 2102 }% 2103% 2104% \cmapOT1TT 2105 \begingroup 2106 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 2107 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 2108%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 2109%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 2110%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0) 2111%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0) 2112%%Version: 1.000 2113%%EndComments 2114/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 211512 dict begin 2116begincmap 2117/CIDSystemInfo 2118<< /Registry (TeX) 2119/Ordering (OT1TT) 2120/Supplement 0 2121>> def 2122/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def 2123/CMapType 2 def 21241 begincodespacerange 2125<00> <7F> 2126endcodespacerange 21275 beginbfrange 2128<00> <01> <0393> 2129<09> <0A> <03A8> 2130<21> <26> <0021> 2131<28> <5F> <0028> 2132<61> <7E> <0061> 2133endbfrange 213432 beginbfchar 2135<02> <0398> 2136<03> <039B> 2137<04> <039E> 2138<05> <03A0> 2139<06> <03A3> 2140<07> <03D2> 2141<08> <03A6> 2142<0B> <2191> 2143<0C> <2193> 2144<0D> <0027> 2145<0E> <00A1> 2146<0F> <00BF> 2147<10> <0131> 2148<11> <0237> 2149<12> <0060> 2150<13> <00B4> 2151<14> <02C7> 2152<15> <02D8> 2153<16> <00AF> 2154<17> <02DA> 2155<18> <00B8> 2156<19> <00DF> 2157<1A> <00E6> 2158<1B> <0153> 2159<1C> <00F8> 2160<1D> <00C6> 2161<1E> <0152> 2162<1F> <00D8> 2163<20> <2423> 2164<27> <2019> 2165<60> <2018> 2166<7F> <00A8> 2167endbfchar 2168endcmap 2169CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 2170end 2171end 2172%%EndResource 2173%%EOF 2174 }\endgroup 2175 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{% 2176 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 2177 }% 2178\fi\fi 2179 2180 2181% Set the font macro #1 to the font named \fontprefix#2. 2182% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap 2183% encoding (only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, or empty to omit). 2184% Example: 2185% #1 = \textrm 2186% #2 = \rmshape 2187% #3 = 10 2188% #4 = \mainmagstep 2189% #5 = OT1 2190% 2191\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{% 2192 \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4 2193 \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1% 2194} 2195% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty. 2196\let\cmap\gobble 2197% 2198% (end of cmaps) 2199 2200% Use cm as the default font prefix. 2201% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix 2202% before you read in texinfo.tex. 2203\ifx\fontprefix\thisisundefined 2204\def\fontprefix{cm} 2205\fi 2206% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. 2207\def\rmshape{r} 2208\def\rmbshape{bx} % where the normal face is bold 2209\def\bfshape{b} 2210\def\bxshape{bx} 2211\def\ttshape{tt} 2212\def\ttbshape{tt} 2213\def\ttslshape{sltt} 2214\def\itshape{ti} 2215\def\itbshape{bxti} 2216\def\slshape{sl} 2217\def\slbshape{bxsl} 2218\def\sfshape{ss} 2219\def\sfbshape{ss} 2220\def\scshape{csc} 2221\def\scbshape{csc} 2222 2223% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. (The default in Texinfo.) 2224% 2225\def\definetextfontsizexi{% 2226% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1). 2227\def\textnominalsize{11pt} 2228\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf} 2229\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2230\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2231\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2232\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 2233\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2234\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2235\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2236\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2237\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 2238\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 2239\def\textecsize{1095} 2240 2241% A few fonts for @defun names and args. 2242\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2243\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2244\setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2245\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2246\def\df{\let\ttfont=\deftt \let\bffont = \defbf 2247\let\ttslfont=\defttsl \let\slfont=\defsl \bf} 2248 2249% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 2250\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 2251\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2252\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2253\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2254\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2255\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2256\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2257\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2258\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2259\font\smalli=cmmi9 2260\font\smallsy=cmsy9 2261\def\smallecsize{0900} 2262 2263% Fonts for small examples (8pt). 2264\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 2265\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2266\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 2267\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2268\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 2269\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2270\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2271\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2272\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 2273\font\smalleri=cmmi8 2274\font\smallersy=cmsy8 2275\def\smallerecsize{0800} 2276 2277% Fonts for math mode superscripts (7pt). 2278\def\sevennominalsize{7pt} 2279\setfont\sevenrm\rmshape{7}{1000}{OT1} 2280\setfont\seventt\ttshape{10}{700}{OT1TT} 2281\setfont\sevenbf\bfshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2282\setfont\sevenit\itshape{7}{1000}{OT1IT} 2283\setfont\sevensl\slshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2284\setfont\sevensf\sfshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2285\setfont\sevensc\scshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2286\setfont\seventtsl\ttslshape{10}{700}{OT1TT} 2287\font\seveni=cmmi7 2288\font\sevensy=cmsy7 2289\def\sevenecsize{0700} 2290 2291% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 2292\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 2293\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2294\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 2295\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2296\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2297\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 2298\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2299\let\titlebf=\titlerm 2300\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2301\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 2302\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 2303\def\titleecsize{2074} 2304 2305% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). 2306\def\chapnominalsize{17pt} 2307\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2308\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT} 2309\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2310\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2311\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2312\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1} 2313\let\chapbf=\chaprm 2314\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2315\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 2316\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 2317\def\chapecsize{1728} 2318 2319% Section fonts (14.4pt). 2320\def\secnominalsize{14pt} 2321\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2322\setfont\secrmnotbold\rmshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2323\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 2324\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2325\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2326\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2327\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2328\let\secbf\secrm 2329\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2330\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 2331\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 2332\def\sececsize{1440} 2333 2334% Subsection fonts (13.15pt). 2335\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt} 2336\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2337\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT} 2338\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 2339\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2340\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT} 2341\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2342\let\ssecbf\ssecrm 2343\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 2344\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf 2345\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 2346\def\ssececsize{1200} 2347 2348% Reduced fonts for @acronym in text (10pt). 2349\def\reducednominalsize{10pt} 2350\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2351\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2352\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2353\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 2354\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2355\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2356\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2357\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2358\font\reducedi=cmmi10 2359\font\reducedsy=cmsy10 2360\def\reducedecsize{1000} 2361 2362\textleading = 13.2pt % line spacing for 11pt CM 2363\textfonts % reset the current fonts 2364\rm 2365} % end of 11pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizexi 2366 2367 2368% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with 2369% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU 2370% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the 2371% future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt. 2372% 2373\def\definetextfontsizex{% 2374% Text fonts (10pt). 2375\def\textnominalsize{10pt} 2376\edef\mainmagstep{1000} 2377\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2378\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2379\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2380\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 2381\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2382\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2383\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2384\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2385\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 2386\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 2387\def\textecsize{1000} 2388 2389% A few fonts for @defun names and args. 2390\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2391\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2392\setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2393\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2394\def\df{\let\ttfont=\deftt \let\bffont = \defbf 2395\let\slfont=\defsl \let\ttslfont=\defttsl \bf} 2396 2397% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 2398\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 2399\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2400\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2401\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2402\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2403\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2404\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2405\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2406\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2407\font\smalli=cmmi9 2408\font\smallsy=cmsy9 2409\def\smallecsize{0900} 2410 2411% Fonts for small examples (8pt). 2412\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 2413\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2414\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 2415\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2416\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 2417\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2418\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2419\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2420\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 2421\font\smalleri=cmmi8 2422\font\smallersy=cmsy8 2423\def\smallerecsize{0800} 2424 2425% Fonts for math mode superscripts (7pt). 2426\def\sevennominalsize{7pt} 2427\setfont\sevenrm\rmshape{7}{1000}{OT1} 2428\setfont\seventt\ttshape{10}{700}{OT1TT} 2429\setfont\sevenbf\bfshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2430\setfont\sevenit\itshape{7}{1000}{OT1IT} 2431\setfont\sevensl\slshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2432\setfont\sevensf\sfshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2433\setfont\sevensc\scshape{10}{700}{OT1} 2434\setfont\seventtsl\ttslshape{10}{700}{OT1TT} 2435\font\seveni=cmmi7 2436\font\sevensy=cmsy7 2437\def\sevenecsize{0700} 2438 2439% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 2440\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 2441\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2442\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 2443\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2444\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2445\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 2446\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2447\let\titlebf=\titlerm 2448\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2449\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 2450\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 2451\def\titleecsize{2074} 2452 2453% Chapter fonts (14.4pt). 2454\def\chapnominalsize{14pt} 2455\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2456\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 2457\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2458\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2459\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2460\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2461\let\chapbf\chaprm 2462\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2463\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 2464\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 2465\def\chapecsize{1440} 2466 2467% Section fonts (12pt). 2468\def\secnominalsize{12pt} 2469\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2470\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT} 2471\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2472\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2473\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2474\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2475\let\secbf\secrm 2476\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2477\font\seci=cmmi12 2478\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 2479\def\sececsize{1200} 2480 2481% Subsection fonts (10pt). 2482\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt} 2483\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2484\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 2485\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2486\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2487\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2488\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2489\let\ssecbf\ssecrm 2490\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2491\font\sseci=cmmi10 2492\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 2493\def\ssececsize{1000} 2494 2495% Reduced fonts for @acronym in text (9pt). 2496\def\reducednominalsize{9pt} 2497\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2498\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2499\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2500\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2501\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2502\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2503\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2504\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2505\font\reducedi=cmmi9 2506\font\reducedsy=cmsy9 2507\def\reducedecsize{0900} 2508 2509\divide\parskip by 2 % reduce space between paragraphs 2510\textleading = 12pt % line spacing for 10pt CM 2511\textfonts % reset the current fonts 2512\rm 2513} % end of 10pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizex 2514 2515% Fonts for short table of contents. 2516\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2517\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12 2518\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2519\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2520 2521 2522% We provide the user-level command 2523% @fonttextsize 10 2524% (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed. 2525% 2526\def\xiword{11} 2527\def\xword{10} 2528\def\xwordpt{10pt} 2529% 2530\parseargdef\fonttextsize{% 2531 \def\textsizearg{#1}% 2532 %\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}% 2533 % 2534 % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since 2535 % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless. 2536 % 2537 \begingroup \globaldefs=1 2538 \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex 2539 \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi 2540 \else 2541 \errhelp=\EMsimple 2542 \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'} 2543 \fi\fi 2544 \endgroup 2545} 2546 2547% 2548% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle. 2549% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in 2550% italics, not bold italics. 2551% 2552\def\setfontstyle#1{% 2553 \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd. 2554 \csname #1font\endcsname % change the current font 2555} 2556 2557\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}} 2558\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}} 2559\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}} 2560\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf} 2561\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}\def\ttstylename{tt} 2562 2563% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. 2564% So we set up a \sf. 2565\newfam\sffam 2566\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}} 2567 2568% We don't need math for this font style. 2569\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}} 2570 2571 2572% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, 2573% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. 2574% We don't bother to reset \scriptscriptfont; awaiting user need. 2575% 2576\def\resetmathfonts{% 2577 \textfont0=\rmfont \textfont1=\ifont \textfont2=\syfont 2578 \textfont\itfam=\itfont \textfont\slfam=\slfont \textfont\bffam=\bffont 2579 \textfont\ttfam=\ttfont \textfont\sffam=\sffont 2580 % 2581 % Fonts for superscript. Note that the 7pt fonts are used regardless 2582 % of the current font size. 2583 \scriptfont0=\sevenrm \scriptfont1=\seveni \scriptfont2=\sevensy 2584 \scriptfont\itfam=\sevenit \scriptfont\slfam=\sevensl 2585 \scriptfont\bffam=\sevenbf \scriptfont\ttfam=\seventt 2586 \scriptfont\sffam=\sevensf 2587} 2588 2589% 2590 2591% The font-changing commands (all called \...fonts) redefine the meanings 2592% of \STYLEfont, instead of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs 2593% to also set the current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) 2594% commands hardwire \STYLEfont to set the current font. 2595% 2596% The fonts used for \ifont are for "math italics" (\itfont is for italics 2597% in regular text). \syfont is also used in math mode only. 2598% 2599% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower) 2600% and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used 2601% in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms. 2602% 2603% This all needs generalizing, badly. 2604% 2605 2606\def\assignfonts#1{% 2607 \expandafter\let\expandafter\rmfont\csname #1rm\endcsname 2608 \expandafter\let\expandafter\itfont\csname #1it\endcsname 2609 \expandafter\let\expandafter\slfont\csname #1sl\endcsname 2610 \expandafter\let\expandafter\bffont\csname #1bf\endcsname 2611 \expandafter\let\expandafter\ttfont\csname #1tt\endcsname 2612 \expandafter\let\expandafter\smallcaps\csname #1sc\endcsname 2613 \expandafter\let\expandafter\sffont \csname #1sf\endcsname 2614 \expandafter\let\expandafter\ifont \csname #1i\endcsname 2615 \expandafter\let\expandafter\syfont \csname #1sy\endcsname 2616 \expandafter\let\expandafter\ttslfont\csname #1ttsl\endcsname 2617} 2618 2619\newif\ifrmisbold 2620 2621% Select smaller font size with the current style. Used to change font size 2622% in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms. If we are using bold fonts for 2623% normal roman text, also use bold fonts for roman text in the smaller size. 2624\def\switchtolllsize{% 2625 \expandafter\assignfonts\expandafter{\lllsize}% 2626 \ifrmisbold 2627 \let\rmfont\bffont 2628 \fi 2629 \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname 2630}% 2631 2632\def\switchtolsize{% 2633 \expandafter\assignfonts\expandafter{\lsize}% 2634 \ifrmisbold 2635 \let\rmfont\bffont 2636 \fi 2637 \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname 2638}% 2639 2640\def\definefontsetatsize#1#2#3#4#5{% 2641\expandafter\def\csname #1fonts\endcsname{% 2642 \def\curfontsize{#1}% 2643 \def\lsize{#2}\def\lllsize{#3}% 2644 \csname rmisbold#5\endcsname 2645 \assignfonts{#1}% 2646 \resetmathfonts 2647 \setleading{#4}% 2648}} 2649 2650\definefontsetatsize{text} {reduced}{smaller}{\textleading}{false} 2651\definefontsetatsize{title} {chap} {subsec} {27pt} {true} 2652\definefontsetatsize{chap} {sec} {text} {19pt} {true} 2653\definefontsetatsize{sec} {subsec} {reduced}{17pt} {true} 2654\definefontsetatsize{ssec} {text} {small} {15pt} {true} 2655\definefontsetatsize{reduced}{small} {smaller}{10.5pt}{false} 2656\definefontsetatsize{small} {smaller}{smaller}{10.5pt}{false} 2657\definefontsetatsize{smaller}{smaller}{smaller}{9.5pt} {false} 2658 2659\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}} 2660\let\subsecfonts = \ssecfonts 2661\let\subsubsecfonts = \ssecfonts 2662 2663% Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts. 2664\def\angleleft{$\langle$} 2665\def\angleright{$\rangle$} 2666 2667% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments. 2668\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts 2669 2670% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample 2671% can fit this many characters: 2672% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69 2673% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters: 2674% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77 2675% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth 2676% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt. 2677% 2678% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt): 2679% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58 2680% --karl, 24jan03. 2681 2682% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. 2683% 2684\definetextfontsizexi 2685 2686 2687% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the 2688% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and 2689% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have 2690% this property, we can check that font parameter. 2691% 2692\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } 2693 2694{ 2695\catcode`\'=\active 2696\catcode`\`=\active 2697 2698\gdef\setcodequotes{\let`\codequoteleft \let'\codequoteright} 2699\gdef\setregularquotes{\let`\lq \let'\rq} 2700} 2701 2702% Allow an option to not use regular directed right quote/apostrophe 2703% (char 0x27), but instead the undirected quote from cmtt (char 0x0d). 2704% The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it the default, but it 2705% works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least evince), the 2706% lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the regular 0x27. 2707% 2708\def\codequoteright{% 2709 \ifmonospace 2710 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 2711 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 2712 '% 2713 \else \char'15 \fi 2714 \else \char'15 \fi 2715 \else 2716 '% 2717 \fi 2718} 2719% 2720% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent. 2721% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like 2722% the code environments to do likewise. 2723% 2724\def\codequoteleft{% 2725 \ifmonospace 2726 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 2727 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 2728 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391 2729 % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. 2730 \relax`% 2731 \else \char'22 \fi 2732 \else \char'22 \fi 2733 \else 2734 \relax`% 2735 \fi 2736} 2737 2738% Commands to set the quote options. 2739% 2740\parseargdef\codequoteundirected{% 2741 \def\temp{#1}% 2742 \ifx\temp\onword 2743 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname 2744 = t% 2745 \else\ifx\temp\offword 2746 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname 2747 = \relax 2748 \else 2749 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2750 \errmessage{Unknown @codequoteundirected value `\temp', must be on|off}% 2751 \fi\fi 2752} 2753% 2754\parseargdef\codequotebacktick{% 2755 \def\temp{#1}% 2756 \ifx\temp\onword 2757 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname 2758 = t% 2759 \else\ifx\temp\offword 2760 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname 2761 = \relax 2762 \else 2763 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2764 \errmessage{Unknown @codequotebacktick value `\temp', must be on|off}% 2765 \fi\fi 2766} 2767 2768% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. 2769\def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq} 2770 2771% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks 2772\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 2773 2774% Font commands. 2775 2776% #1 is the font command (\sl or \it), #2 is the text to slant. 2777% If we are in a monospaced environment, however, 1) always use \ttsl, 2778% and 2) do not add an italic correction. 2779\def\dosmartslant#1#2{% 2780 \ifusingtt 2781 {{\ttsl #2}\let\next=\relax}% 2782 {\def\next{{#1#2}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}}% 2783 \next 2784} 2785\def\smartslanted{\dosmartslant\sl} 2786\def\smartitalic{\dosmartslant\it} 2787 2788% Output an italic correction unless \next (presumed to be the following 2789% character) is such as not to need one. 2790\def\smartitaliccorrection{% 2791 \ifx\next,% 2792 \else\ifx\next-% 2793 \else\ifx\next.% 2794 \else\ifx\next\.% 2795 \else\ifx\next\comma% 2796 \else\ptexslash 2797 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 2798 \aftersmartic 2799} 2800 2801% Unconditional use \ttsl, and no ic. @var is set to this for defuns. 2802\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}} 2803 2804% @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want 2805% ttsl for book titles, do we? 2806\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection} 2807 2808\def\aftersmartic{} 2809\def\var#1{% 2810 \let\saveaftersmartic = \aftersmartic 2811 \def\aftersmartic{\null\let\aftersmartic=\saveaftersmartic}% 2812 \smartslanted{#1}% 2813} 2814 2815\let\i=\smartitalic 2816\let\slanted=\smartslanted 2817\let\dfn=\smartslanted 2818\let\emph=\smartitalic 2819 2820% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. 2821\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font 2822\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font 2823\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font 2824 2825% @b, explicit bold. Also @strong. 2826\def\b#1{{\bf #1}} 2827\let\strong=\b 2828 2829% @sansserif, explicit sans. 2830\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}} 2831 2832% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at 2833% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the 2834% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. 2835% 2836\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} 2837\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } 2838 2839% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. 2840% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and 2841% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up. 2842% 2843\catcode`@=11 2844 \def\plainfrenchspacing{% 2845 \sfcode`\.=\@m \sfcode`\?=\@m \sfcode`\!=\@m 2846 \sfcode`\:=\@m \sfcode`\;=\@m \sfcode`\,=\@m 2847 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends 2848 } 2849 \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{% 2850 \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000 2851 \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250 2852 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends 2853 } 2854\catcode`@=\other 2855\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default 2856 2857% @t, explicit typewriter. 2858\def\t#1{% 2859 {\tt \plainfrenchspacing #1}% 2860 \null 2861} 2862 2863% @samp. 2864\def\samp#1{{\setcodequotes\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}} 2865 2866% @indicateurl is \samp, that is, with quotes. 2867\let\indicateurl=\samp 2868 2869% @code (and similar) prints in typewriter, but with spaces the same 2870% size as normal in the surrounding text, without hyphenation, etc. 2871% This is a subroutine for that. 2872\def\tclose#1{% 2873 {% 2874 % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. 2875 \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font 2876 % 2877 % Switch to typewriter. 2878 \tt 2879 % 2880 % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. 2881 \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% 2882 % 2883 % Turn off hyphenation. 2884 \nohyphenation 2885 % 2886 \plainfrenchspacing 2887 #1% 2888 }% 2889 \null % reset spacefactor to 1000 2890} 2891 2892% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code. 2893% (But see \codedashfinish below.) 2894% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes 2895% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. 2896% 2897% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control 2898% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. 2899% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) 2900% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. -- rms. 2901{ 2902 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active 2903 \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active 2904 \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions 2905 % 2906 \global\def\code{\begingroup 2907 \setcodequotes 2908 \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active 2909 \ifallowcodebreaks 2910 \let-\codedash 2911 \let_\codeunder 2912 \else 2913 \let-\normaldash 2914 \let_\realunder 2915 \fi 2916 % Given -foo (with a single dash), we do not want to allow a break 2917 % after the hyphen. 2918 \global\let\codedashprev=\codedash 2919 % 2920 \codex 2921 } 2922 % 2923 \gdef\codedash{\futurelet\next\codedashfinish} 2924 \gdef\codedashfinish{% 2925 \normaldash % always output the dash character itself. 2926 % 2927 % Now, output a discretionary to allow a line break, unless 2928 % (a) the next character is a -, or 2929 % (b) the preceding character is a -. 2930 % E.g., given --posix, we do not want to allow a break after either -. 2931 % Given --foo-bar, we do want to allow a break between the - and the b. 2932 \ifx\next\codedash \else 2933 \ifx\codedashprev\codedash 2934 \else \discretionary{}{}{}\fi 2935 \fi 2936 % we need the space after the = for the case when \next itself is a 2937 % space token; it would get swallowed otherwise. As in @code{- a}. 2938 \global\let\codedashprev= \next 2939 } 2940} 2941\def\normaldash{-} 2942% 2943\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} 2944 2945\def\codeunder{% 2946 % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _ 2947 % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.) 2948 % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us 2949 % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop. 2950 \ifusingtt{\ifmmode 2951 \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_. 2952 \else\normalunderscore \fi 2953 \discretionary{}{}{}}% 2954 {\_}% 2955} 2956 2957% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g., 2958% each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is bad. 2959% @allowcodebreaks provides a document-level way to turn breaking at - 2960% and _ on and off. 2961% 2962\newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue 2963 2964\def\keywordtrue{true} 2965\def\keywordfalse{false} 2966 2967\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{% 2968 \def\txiarg{#1}% 2969 \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue 2970 \allowcodebreakstrue 2971 \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse 2972 \allowcodebreaksfalse 2973 \else 2974 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2975 \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg', must be true|false}% 2976 \fi\fi 2977} 2978 2979% For @command, @env, @file, @option quotes seem unnecessary, 2980% so use \code rather than \samp. 2981\let\command=\code 2982\let\env=\code 2983\let\file=\code 2984\let\option=\code 2985 2986% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') aka @url takes an optional 2987% (comma-separated) second argument specifying the text to display and 2988% an optional third arg as text to display instead of (rather than in 2989% addition to) the url itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. 2990 2991% TeX-only option to allow changing PDF output to show only the second 2992% arg (if given), and not the url (which is then just the link target). 2993\newif\ifurefurlonlylink 2994 2995% The default \pretolerance setting stops the penalty inserted in 2996% \urefallowbreak being a discouragement to line breaking. Set it to 2997% a negative value for this paragraph only. Hopefully this does not 2998% conflict with redefinitions of \par done elsewhere. 2999\def\nopretolerance{% 3000\pretolerance=-1 3001\def\par{\endgraf\pretolerance=100 \let\par\endgraf}% 3002} 3003 3004% The main macro is \urefbreak, which allows breaking at expected 3005% places within the url. 3006\def\urefbreak{\nopretolerance \begingroup \urefcatcodes \dourefbreak} 3007\let\uref=\urefbreak 3008% 3009\def\dourefbreak#1{\urefbreakfinish #1,,,\finish} 3010\def\urefbreakfinish#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% doesn't work in @example 3011 \unsepspaces 3012 \pdfurl{#1}% 3013 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 3014 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 3015 \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that 3016 \else 3017 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% look for second arg 3018 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 3019 \ifpdf 3020 % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX 3021 \ifurefurlonlylink 3022 % PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg 3023 \unhbox0 3024 \else 3025 % PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency, 3026 % visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc. 3027 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% 3028 \fi 3029 \else 3030 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 3031 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% DVI, always show arg and url 3032 \else 3033 % For XeTeX 3034 \ifurefurlonlylink 3035 % PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg 3036 \unhbox0 3037 \else 3038 % PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency, 3039 % visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc. 3040 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% 3041 \fi 3042 \fi 3043 \fi 3044 \else 3045 \urefcode{#1}% only url given, so show it 3046 \fi 3047 \fi 3048 \endlink 3049\endgroup} 3050 3051% Allow line breaks around only a few characters (only). 3052\def\urefcatcodes{% 3053 \catcode`\&=\active \catcode`\.=\active 3054 \catcode`\#=\active \catcode`\?=\active 3055 \catcode`\/=\active 3056} 3057{ 3058 \urefcatcodes 3059 % 3060 \global\def\urefcode{\begingroup 3061 \setcodequotes 3062 \urefcatcodes 3063 \let&\urefcodeamp 3064 \let.\urefcodedot 3065 \let#\urefcodehash 3066 \let?\urefcodequest 3067 \let/\urefcodeslash 3068 \codex 3069 } 3070 % 3071 % By default, they are just regular characters. 3072 \global\def&{\normalamp} 3073 \global\def.{\normaldot} 3074 \global\def#{\normalhash} 3075 \global\def?{\normalquest} 3076 \global\def/{\normalslash} 3077} 3078 3079\def\urefcodeamp{\urefprebreak \&\urefpostbreak} 3080\def\urefcodedot{\urefprebreak .\urefpostbreak} 3081\def\urefcodehash{\urefprebreak \#\urefpostbreak} 3082\def\urefcodequest{\urefprebreak ?\urefpostbreak} 3083\def\urefcodeslash{\futurelet\next\urefcodeslashfinish} 3084{ 3085 \catcode`\/=\active 3086 \global\def\urefcodeslashfinish{% 3087 \urefprebreak \slashChar 3088 % Allow line break only after the final / in a sequence of 3089 % slashes, to avoid line break between the slashes in http://. 3090 \ifx\next/\else \urefpostbreak \fi 3091 } 3092} 3093 3094% By default we'll break after the special characters, but some people like to 3095% break before the special chars, so allow that. Also allow no breaking at 3096% all, for manual control. 3097% 3098\parseargdef\urefbreakstyle{% 3099 \def\txiarg{#1}% 3100 \ifx\txiarg\wordnone 3101 \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak} 3102 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordbefore 3103 \def\urefprebreak{\urefallowbreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak} 3104 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordafter 3105 \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\urefallowbreak} 3106 \else 3107 \errhelp = \EMsimple 3108 \errmessage{Unknown @urefbreakstyle setting `\txiarg'}% 3109 \fi\fi\fi 3110} 3111\def\wordafter{after} 3112\def\wordbefore{before} 3113\def\wordnone{none} 3114 3115% Allow a ragged right output to aid breaking long URL's. There can 3116% be a break at the \allowbreak with no extra glue (if the existing stretch in 3117% the line is sufficient), a break at the \penalty with extra glue added 3118% at the end of the line, or no break at all here. 3119% Changing the value of the penalty and/or the amount of stretch affects how 3120% preferable one choice is over the other. 3121\def\urefallowbreak{% 3122 \penalty0\relax 3123 \hskip 0pt plus 2 em\relax 3124 \penalty1000\relax 3125 \hskip 0pt plus -2 em\relax 3126} 3127 3128\urefbreakstyle after 3129 3130% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it. 3131% 3132\let\url=\uref 3133 3134% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97. 3135% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf. 3136% 3137%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} 3138\ifpdforxetex 3139 \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} 3140 \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup 3141 \unsepspaces 3142 \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% 3143 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 3144 \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi 3145 \endlink 3146 \endgroup} 3147\else 3148 \let\email=\uref 3149\fi 3150 3151% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), 3152% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), 3153% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). 3154\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{% 3155 \def\txiarg{#1}% 3156 \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct 3157 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% 3158 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample 3159 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 3160 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode 3161 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 3162 \else 3163 \errhelp = \EMsimple 3164 \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle setting `\txiarg'}% 3165 \fi\fi\fi 3166} 3167\def\worddistinct{distinct} 3168\def\wordexample{example} 3169\def\wordcode{code} 3170 3171% Default is `distinct'. 3172\kbdinputstyle distinct 3173 3174% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, 3175% then @kbd has no effect. 3176\def\kbd#1{{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdsub\look??\par}} 3177 3178\def\xkey{\key} 3179\def\kbdsub#1#2#3\par{% 3180 \def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% 3181 \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% 3182 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setcodequotes\look}}\fi 3183 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setcodequotes\look}}\fi 3184} 3185 3186% definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size. 3187%\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 3188%\font\keysy=cmsy9 3189%\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% 3190% \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% 3191% \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt 3192% \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% 3193% \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% 3194% \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} 3195 3196% definition of @key with no lozenge. 3197% 3198\def\key#1{{\setregularquotes \nohyphenation \tt #1}\null} 3199 3200% @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...} 3201\def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup} 3202 3203% @clickstyle @arrow (by default) 3204\parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}} 3205\def\click{\arrow} 3206 3207% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the 3208% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. 3209% 3210\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} 3211 3212% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like. 3213% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for 3214% all-uppercase. 3215% 3216\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish} 3217\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{% 3218 {\switchtolsize #1}% 3219 \def\temp{#2}% 3220 \ifx\temp\empty \else 3221 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 3222 \fi 3223 \null % reset \spacefactor=1000 3224} 3225 3226% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like. 3227% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing. 3228% 3229\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish} 3230\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{% 3231 {\plainfrenchspacing #1}% 3232 \def\temp{#2}% 3233 \ifx\temp\empty \else 3234 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 3235 \fi 3236 \null % reset \spacefactor=1000 3237} 3238 3239% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. 3240% 3241\def\asis#1{#1} 3242 3243% @math outputs its argument in math mode. 3244% 3245% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean 3246% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make 3247% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam, 3248% which is what @var uses. 3249{ 3250 \catcode`\_ = \active 3251 \gdef\mathunderscore{% 3252 \catcode`\_=\active 3253 \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}% 3254 } 3255} 3256% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a math (or tt) \. 3257% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (for no 3258% particular reason), but this is not advertised and we don't care. 3259% 3260% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\. 3261\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi} 3262% 3263\def\math{% 3264 \ifmmode\else % only go into math if not in math mode already 3265 \tex 3266 \mathunderscore 3267 \let\\ = \mathbackslash 3268 \mathactive 3269 % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode 3270 \let\"=\ddot 3271 \let\'=\acute 3272 \let\==\bar 3273 \let\^=\hat 3274 \let\`=\grave 3275 \let\u=\breve 3276 \let\v=\check 3277 \let\~=\tilde 3278 \let\dotaccent=\dot 3279 % have to provide another name for sup operator 3280 \let\mathopsup=\sup 3281 $\expandafter\finishmath\fi 3282} 3283\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex. 3284 3285% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math. 3286% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument 3287% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section). 3288% 3289{ 3290 \catcode`^ = \active 3291 \catcode`< = \active 3292 \catcode`> = \active 3293 \catcode`+ = \active 3294 \catcode`' = \active 3295 \gdef\mathactive{% 3296 \let^ = \ptexhat 3297 \let< = \ptexless 3298 \let> = \ptexgtr 3299 \let+ = \ptexplus 3300 \let' = \ptexquoteright 3301 } 3302} 3303 3304% for @sub and @sup, if in math mode, just do a normal sub/superscript. 3305% If in text, use math to place as sub/superscript, but switch 3306% into text mode, with smaller fonts. This is a different font than the 3307% one used for real math sub/superscripts (8pt vs. 7pt), but let's not 3308% fix it (significant additions to font machinery) until someone notices. 3309% 3310\def\sub{\ifmmode \expandafter\sb \else \expandafter\finishsub\fi} 3311\def\finishsub#1{$\sb{\hbox{\switchtolllsize #1}}$}% 3312% 3313\def\sup{\ifmmode \expandafter\ptexsp \else \expandafter\finishsup\fi} 3314\def\finishsup#1{$\ptexsp{\hbox{\switchtolllsize #1}}$}% 3315 3316% provide this command from LaTeX as it is very common 3317\def\frac#1#2{{{#1}\over{#2}}} 3318 3319% @displaymath. 3320% \globaldefs is needed to recognize the end lines in \tex and 3321% \end tex. Set \thisenv as @end displaymath is seen before @end tex. 3322{\obeylines 3323\globaldefs=1 3324\envdef\displaymath{% 3325\tex% 3326\def\thisenv{\displaymath}% 3327\begingroup\let\end\displaymathend% 3328$$% 3329} 3330 3331\def\displaymathend{$$\endgroup\end}% 3332 3333\def\Edisplaymath{% 3334\def\thisenv{\tex}% 3335\end tex 3336}} 3337 3338 3339% @inlinefmt{FMTNAME,PROCESSED-TEXT} and @inlineraw{FMTNAME,RAW-TEXT}. 3340% Ignore unless FMTNAME == tex; then it is like @iftex and @tex, 3341% except specified as a normal braced arg, so no newlines to worry about. 3342% 3343\def\outfmtnametex{tex} 3344% 3345\long\def\inlinefmt#1{\doinlinefmt #1,\finish} 3346\long\def\doinlinefmt#1,#2,\finish{% 3347 \def\inlinefmtname{#1}% 3348 \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi 3349} 3350% 3351% @inlinefmtifelse{FMTNAME,THEN-TEXT,ELSE-TEXT} expands THEN-TEXT if 3352% FMTNAME is tex, else ELSE-TEXT. 3353\long\def\inlinefmtifelse#1{\doinlinefmtifelse #1,,,\finish} 3354\long\def\doinlinefmtifelse#1,#2,#3,#4,\finish{% 3355 \def\inlinefmtname{#1}% 3356 \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\else \ignorespaces #3\fi 3357} 3358% 3359% For raw, must switch into @tex before parsing the argument, to avoid 3360% setting catcodes prematurely. Doing it this way means that, for 3361% example, @inlineraw{html, foo{bar} gets a parse error instead of being 3362% ignored. But this isn't important because if people want a literal 3363% *right* brace they would have to use a command anyway, so they may as 3364% well use a command to get a left brace too. We could re-use the 3365% delimiter character idea from \verb, but it seems like overkill. 3366% 3367\long\def\inlineraw{\tex \doinlineraw} 3368\long\def\doinlineraw#1{\doinlinerawtwo #1,\finish} 3369\def\doinlinerawtwo#1,#2,\finish{% 3370 \def\inlinerawname{#1}% 3371 \ifx\inlinerawname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi 3372 \endgroup % close group opened by \tex. 3373} 3374 3375% @inlineifset{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is @set. 3376% 3377\long\def\inlineifset#1{\doinlineifset #1,\finish} 3378\long\def\doinlineifset#1,#2,\finish{% 3379 \def\inlinevarname{#1}% 3380 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax 3381 \else\ignorespaces#2\fi 3382} 3383 3384% @inlineifclear{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is not @set. 3385% 3386\long\def\inlineifclear#1{\doinlineifclear #1,\finish} 3387\long\def\doinlineifclear#1,#2,\finish{% 3388 \def\inlinevarname{#1}% 3389 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax \ignorespaces#2\fi 3390} 3391 3392 3393\message{glyphs,} 3394% and logos. 3395 3396% @@ prints an @, as does @atchar{}. 3397\def\@{\char64 } 3398\let\atchar=\@ 3399 3400% @{ @} @lbracechar{} @rbracechar{} all generate brace characters. 3401\def\lbracechar{{\ifmonospace\char123\else\ensuremath\lbrace\fi}} 3402\def\rbracechar{{\ifmonospace\char125\else\ensuremath\rbrace\fi}} 3403\let\{=\lbracechar 3404\let\}=\rbracechar 3405 3406% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems. 3407\let\comma = , 3408 3409% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent 3410% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H. 3411\let\, = \ptexc 3412\let\dotaccent = \ptexdot 3413\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} 3414\let\tieaccent = \ptext 3415\let\ubaraccent = \ptexb 3416\let\udotaccent = \d 3417 3418% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm 3419% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss. 3420\def\questiondown{?`} 3421\def\exclamdown{!`} 3422\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize \underbar{a}}} 3423\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize \underbar{o}}} 3424 3425% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. 3426\def\imacro{i} 3427\def\jmacro{j} 3428\def\dotless#1{% 3429 \def\temp{#1}% 3430 \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi 3431 \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi 3432 \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% 3433 \fi\fi 3434} 3435 3436% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a 3437% period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.) 3438% 3439\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 } 3440 3441% @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in 3442% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most 3443% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using 3444% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and 3445% \scriptscriptstyle). 3446% 3447\def\LaTeX{% 3448 L\kern-.36em 3449 {\setbox0=\hbox{T}% 3450 \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{% 3451 \ifx\textnominalsize\xwordpt 3452 % for 10pt running text, lllsize (8pt) is too small for the A in LaTeX. 3453 % Revert to plain's \scriptsize, which is 7pt. 3454 \count255=\the\fam $\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$% 3455 \else 3456 % For 11pt, we can use our lllsize. 3457 \switchtolllsize A% 3458 \fi 3459 }% 3460 \vss 3461 }}% 3462 \kern-.15em 3463 \TeX 3464} 3465 3466% Some math mode symbols. Define \ensuremath to switch into math mode 3467% unless we are already there. Expansion tricks may not be needed here, 3468% but safer, and can't hurt. 3469\def\ensuremath{\ifmmode \expandafter\asis \else\expandafter\ensuredmath \fi} 3470\def\ensuredmath#1{$\relax#1$} 3471% 3472\def\bullet{\ensuremath\ptexbullet} 3473\def\geq{\ensuremath\ge} 3474\def\leq{\ensuremath\le} 3475\def\minus{\ensuremath-} 3476 3477% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font. 3478% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm 3479% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand, 3480% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do 3481% whichever is larger. 3482% 3483\def\dots{% 3484 \leavevmode 3485 \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods 3486 \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em 3487 \dimen0 = \wd0 3488 \else 3489 \dimen0 = 1.5em 3490 \fi 3491 \hbox to \dimen0{% 3492 \hskip 0pt plus.25fil 3493 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 3494 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 3495 .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil 3496 }% 3497} 3498 3499% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. 3500% 3501\def\enddots{% 3502 \dots 3503 \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor 3504} 3505 3506% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. 3507% 3508% Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of 3509% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. 3510% 3511\def\point{$\star$} 3512\def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}} 3513\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} 3514\def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} 3515\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} 3516\def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} 3517 3518% The @error{} command. 3519% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. 3520% 3521\newbox\errorbox 3522% 3523{\ttfont \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. 3524\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules 3525% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) 3526\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf \putworderror\kern-1.5pt} 3527% 3528\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil 3529 \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. 3530 \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. 3531 \vbox{% 3532 \hrule height\dimen2 3533 \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. 3534 \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. 3535 \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. 3536 \hrule height\dimen2} 3537 \hfil} 3538% 3539\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} 3540 3541% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font. 3542% 3543\def\pounds{\ifmonospace{\ecfont\char"BF}\else{\it\$}\fi} 3544 3545% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style. 3546% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik 3547% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and 3548% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need). 3549% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym. 3550% 3551% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore 3552% that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular 3553% font height. 3554% 3555% feymr - regular 3556% feymo - slanted 3557% feybr - bold 3558% feybo - bold slanted 3559% 3560% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge. 3561% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide. 3562% Hmm. 3563% 3564% Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols? 3565% Hope not. 3566% 3567% 3568\def\euro{{\eurofont e}} 3569\def\eurofont{% 3570 % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in 3571 % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that 3572 % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the 3573 % font installed. 3574 % 3575 % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale 3576 % that to the current nominal size. 3577 % 3578 % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but 3579 % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts. 3580 % 3581 \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 3582 % 3583 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 3584 % bold: 3585 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize 3586 \else 3587 % regular: 3588 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize 3589 \fi 3590 \thiseurofont 3591} 3592 3593% Glyphs from the EC fonts. We don't use \let for the aliases, because 3594% sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect 3595% the redefinition. 3596% 3597% Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters. 3598\def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth 3599\def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth 3600\def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn 3601\def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn 3602% 3603\def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}} 3604\def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft} 3605\def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}} 3606\def\guillemotright{\guillemetright} 3607\def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}} 3608\def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}} 3609\def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}} 3610\def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}} 3611% 3612\def\L{{\ecfont \char"8A}} % L with stroke 3613\def\l{{\ecfont \char"AA}} % l with stroke 3614% 3615% This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but 3616% we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the 3617% tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer 3618% dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc. 3619% 3620% ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using 3621% the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in 3622% the same EC font. 3623\def\ogonek#1{{% 3624 \def\temp{#1}% 3625 \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek 3626 \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek 3627 \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek 3628 \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek 3629 \else 3630 \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}% 3631 \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1% 3632 \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}% 3633 \fi 3634 \fi\fi\fi\fi 3635 }% 3636} 3637\def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A} 3638\def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a} 3639\def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E} 3640\def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e} 3641% 3642% Use the European Computer Modern fonts (cm-super in outline format) 3643% for non-CM glyphs. That is ec* for regular text and tc* for the text 3644% companion symbols (LaTeX TS1 encoding). Both are part of the ec 3645% package and follow the same conventions. 3646% 3647\def\ecfont{\etcfont{e}} 3648\def\tcfont{\etcfont{t}} 3649% 3650\def\etcfont#1{% 3651 % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this 3652 % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German 3653 % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so 3654 % hopefully nobody will notice/care. 3655 \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}% 3656 \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 3657 \ifmonospace 3658 % typewriter: 3659 \font\thisecfont = #1ctt\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3660 \else 3661 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 3662 % bold: 3663 \font\thisecfont = #1cb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3664 \else 3665 % regular: 3666 \font\thisecfont = #1c\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3667 \fi 3668 \fi 3669 \thisecfont 3670} 3671 3672% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really 3673% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now. 3674% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright. 3675% 3676\def\registeredsymbol{% 3677 $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize R}% 3678 \hfil\crcr\Orb}}% 3679 }$% 3680} 3681 3682% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign. 3683% 3684\def\textdegree{$^\circ$} 3685 3686% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with: 3687% Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38 3688% so we'll define it if necessary. 3689% 3690\ifx\Orb\thisisundefined 3691\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D} 3692\fi 3693 3694% Quotes. 3695\chardef\quoteleft=`\` 3696\chardef\quoteright=`\' 3697 3698% only change font for tt for correct kerning and to avoid using 3699% \ecfont unless necessary. 3700\def\quotedblleft{% 3701 \ifmonospace{\ecfont\char"10}\else{\char"5C}\fi 3702} 3703 3704\def\quotedblright{% 3705 \ifmonospace{\ecfont\char"11}\else{\char`\"}\fi 3706} 3707 3708 3709\message{page headings,} 3710 3711\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in 3712\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc 3713 3714% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. 3715\newif\ifseenauthor 3716\newif\iffinishedtitlepage 3717 3718% @setcontentsaftertitlepage used to do an implicit @contents or 3719% @shortcontents after @end titlepage, but it is now obsolete. 3720\def\setcontentsaftertitlepage{% 3721 \errmessage{@setcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo 3722 command; move your @contents command if you want the contents 3723 after the title page.}}% 3724\def\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage{% 3725 \errmessage{@setshortcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo 3726 command; move your @shortcontents and @contents commands if you 3727 want the contents after the title page.}}% 3728 3729\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{% 3730 \begingroup \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% 3731 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} 3732 3733\envdef\titlepage{% 3734 % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage. 3735 \begingroup 3736 \parindent=0pt \textfonts 3737 % Leave some space at the very top of the page. 3738 \vglue\titlepagetopglue 3739 % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. 3740 \finishedtitlepagetrue 3741 % 3742 % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space 3743 % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. 3744 \let\oldpage = \page 3745 \def\page{% 3746 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 3747 \finishtitlepage 3748 \fi 3749 \let\page = \oldpage 3750 \page 3751 \null 3752 }% 3753} 3754 3755\def\Etitlepage{% 3756 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 3757 \finishtitlepage 3758 \fi 3759 % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, 3760 % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. 3761 % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page 3762 % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. 3763 \oldpage 3764 \endgroup 3765 % 3766 % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are 3767 % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers. 3768 \HEADINGSon 3769} 3770 3771\def\finishtitlepage{% 3772 \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize 3773 \vskip\titlepagebottomglue 3774 \finishedtitlepagetrue 3775} 3776 3777% Settings used for typesetting titles: no hyphenation, no indentation, 3778% don't worry much about spacing, ragged right. This should be used 3779% inside a \vbox, and fonts need to be set appropriately first. \par should 3780% be specified before the end of the \vbox, since a vbox is a group. 3781% 3782\def\raggedtitlesettings{% 3783 \rm 3784 \hyphenpenalty=10000 3785 \parindent=0pt 3786 \tolerance=5000 3787 \ptexraggedright 3788} 3789 3790% Macros to be used within @titlepage: 3791 3792\let\subtitlerm=\rmfont 3793\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines} 3794 3795\parseargdef\title{% 3796 \checkenv\titlepage 3797 \vbox{\titlefonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}% 3798 % print a rule at the page bottom also. 3799 \finishedtitlepagefalse 3800 \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt 3801} 3802 3803\parseargdef\subtitle{% 3804 \checkenv\titlepage 3805 {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}% 3806} 3807 3808% @author should come last, but may come many times. 3809% It can also be used inside @quotation. 3810% 3811\parseargdef\author{% 3812 \def\temp{\quotation}% 3813 \ifx\thisenv\temp 3814 \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation. 3815 \else 3816 \checkenv\titlepage 3817 \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi 3818 {\secfonts\rm \leftline{#1}}% 3819 \fi 3820} 3821 3822 3823% Set up page headings and footings. 3824 3825\let\thispage=\folio 3826 3827\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages 3828\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages 3829\newtoks\evenchapheadline% headline on even pages with a new chapter 3830\newtoks\oddchapheadline % headline on odd pages with a new chapter 3831\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages 3832\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages 3833 3834% Now make \makeheadline and \makefootline in Plain TeX use those variables 3835\headline={{\textfonts\rm 3836 \ifchapterpage 3837 \ifodd\pageno\the\oddchapheadline\else\the\evenchapheadline\fi 3838 \else 3839 \ifodd\pageno\the\oddheadline\else\the\evenheadline\fi 3840 \fi}} 3841 3842\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline 3843 \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} 3844\let\HEADINGShook=\relax 3845 3846% Commands to set those variables. 3847% For example, this is what @headings on does 3848% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter 3849% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle 3850% @evenfooting @thisfile|| 3851% @oddfooting ||@thisfile 3852 3853 3854\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} 3855\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3856\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3857 \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}} 3858 \global\evenchapheadline=\evenheadline} 3859 3860\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} 3861\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3862\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3863 \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% 3864 \global\oddchapheadline=\oddheadline} 3865 3866\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% 3867 3868\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} 3869\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3870\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3871\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3872 3873\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} 3874\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3875\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3876 \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% 3877 % 3878 % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume 3879 % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. 3880 \global\advance\txipageheight by -12pt 3881 \global\advance\vsize by -12pt 3882} 3883 3884\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} 3885 3886% @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page 3887% @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page 3888% 3889% The same set of arguments for: 3890% 3891% @oddheadingmarks 3892% @evenfootingmarks 3893% @oddfootingmarks 3894% @everyheadingmarks 3895% @everyfootingmarks 3896 3897% These define \getoddheadingmarks, \getevenheadingmarks, 3898% \getoddfootingmarks, and \getevenfootingmarks, each to one of 3899% \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks. 3900% 3901\def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}} 3902\def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}} 3903\def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}} 3904\def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}} 3905\parseargdef\everyheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1} 3906 \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} } 3907\parseargdef\everyfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1} 3908 \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} } 3909% #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom. 3910\def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {% 3911 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname 3912 \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp 3913} 3914 3915\everyheadingmarks bottom 3916\everyfootingmarks bottom 3917 3918% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. 3919% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. 3920% @headings off turns them off. 3921% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. 3922% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. 3923% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. 3924% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. 3925% By default, they are off at the start of a document, 3926% and turned `on' after @end titlepage. 3927 3928\parseargdef\headings{\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} 3929 3930\def\headingsoff{% non-global headings elimination 3931 \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}\evenchapheadline={\hfil}% 3932 \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}\oddchapheadline={\hfil}% 3933} 3934 3935\def\HEADINGSoff{{\globaldefs=1 \headingsoff}} % global setting 3936\HEADINGSoff % it's the default 3937 3938% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. 3939\def\pageone{ 3940 \global\pageno=1 3941 \global\arabiccount = \pagecount 3942} 3943 3944% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, 3945% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document 3946% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top 3947% edge of all pages. 3948\def\HEADINGSdouble{% 3949\pageone 3950\HEADINGSdoublex 3951} 3952\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3953 3954% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, 3955% page number on top right. 3956\def\HEADINGSsingle{% 3957\pageone 3958\HEADINGSsinglex 3959} 3960\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} 3961 3962\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} 3963\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter 3964\def\HEADINGSdoublex{% 3965\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3966\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3967\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 3968\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3969\global\evenchapheadline={\line{\folio\hfil}} 3970\global\oddchapheadline={\line{\hfil\folio}} 3971\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 3972} 3973 3974\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} 3975\def\HEADINGSsinglex{% 3976\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3977\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3978\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3979\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3980\global\evenchapheadline={\line{\hfil\folio}} 3981\global\oddchapheadline={\line{\hfil\folio}} 3982\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3983} 3984 3985% for @setchapternewpage off 3986\def\HEADINGSsinglechapoff{% 3987\pageone 3988\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3989\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3990\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3991\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} 3992\global\evenchapheadline=\evenheadline 3993\global\oddchapheadline=\oddheadline 3994\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3995} 3996 3997% Subroutines used in generating headings 3998% This produces Day Month Year style of output. 3999% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set 4000% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this). 4001\ifx\today\thisisundefined 4002\def\today{% 4003 \number\day\space 4004 \ifcase\month 4005 \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr 4006 \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug 4007 \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec 4008 \fi 4009 \space\number\year} 4010\fi 4011 4012% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings. 4013% It generates no output of its own. 4014\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} 4015\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}} 4016 4017 4018\message{tables,} 4019% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x). 4020 4021% default indentation of table text 4022\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in 4023% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text 4024\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in 4025% margin between end of table item and start of table text. 4026\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in 4027 4028% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin 4029\newdimen\itemmax 4030 4031% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with 4032% these defs. 4033% They also define \itemindex 4034% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). 4035 4036\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip 4037 4038\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} 4039 4040\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} 4041\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} 4042 4043\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % 4044 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 4045 \advance\hsize by -\tableindent 4046 \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}% 4047 \itemindex{#1}% 4048 \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. 4049 % 4050 % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line 4051 % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that 4052 % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next 4053 % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the 4054 % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. 4055 \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax 4056 % 4057 % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, 4058 % but leave it ragged-right. 4059 \begingroup 4060 \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent 4061 \advance\hsize by\tableindent 4062 \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil\relax 4063 \leavevmode\unhbox0\par 4064 \endgroup 4065 % 4066 % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the 4067 % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. 4068 \nobreak \vskip-\parskip 4069 % 4070 % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if 4071 % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no 4072 % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would 4073 % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this 4074 % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert 4075 % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also. 4076 % 4077 \penalty 10001 4078 \endgroup 4079 \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse 4080 \else 4081 % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the 4082 % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. 4083 \noindent 4084 % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in 4085 % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and 4086 % eventually be printed. 4087 \nobreak\kern-\tableindent 4088 \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 4089 \unhbox0 4090 \nobreak\kern\dimen0 4091 \endgroup 4092 \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue 4093 \fi 4094} 4095 4096\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}} 4097\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}} 4098 4099% @table, @ftable, @vtable. 4100\envdef\table{% 4101 \let\itemindex\gobble 4102 \tablecheck{table}% 4103} 4104\envdef\ftable{% 4105 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}% 4106 \tablecheck{ftable}% 4107} 4108\envdef\vtable{% 4109 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}% 4110 \tablecheck{vtable}% 4111} 4112\def\tablecheck#1{% 4113 \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active 4114 \endgroup 4115 \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is 4116 that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}% 4117 \def\next{\doignore{#1}}% 4118 \else 4119 \let\next\tablex 4120 \fi 4121 \next 4122} 4123\def\tablex#1{% 4124 \def\itemindicate{#1}% 4125 \parsearg\tabley 4126} 4127\def\tabley#1{% 4128 {% 4129 \makevalueexpandable 4130 \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}% 4131 \expandafter 4132 }\temp \endtablez 4133} 4134\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{% 4135 \aboveenvbreak 4136 \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi 4137 \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi 4138 \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi 4139 \itemmax=\tableindent 4140 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin 4141 \advance \leftskip by \tableindent 4142 \exdentamount=\tableindent 4143 \parindent = 0pt 4144 \parskip = \smallskipamount 4145 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 4146 \let\item = \internalBitem 4147 \let\itemx = \internalBitemx 4148} 4149\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak} 4150\let\Eftable\Etable 4151\let\Evtable\Etable 4152\let\Eitemize\Etable 4153\let\Eenumerate\Etable 4154 4155% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize 4156 4157\newcount \itemno 4158 4159\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize} 4160 4161\def\doitemize#1{% 4162 \aboveenvbreak 4163 \itemmax=\itemindent 4164 \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin 4165 \advance\leftskip by \itemindent 4166 \exdentamount=\itemindent 4167 \parindent=0pt 4168 \parskip=\smallskipamount 4169 \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 4170 % 4171 % Try typesetting the item mark so that if the document erroneously says 4172 % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error 4173 % right away at the @itemize. It's not the best error message in the 4174 % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item. This means if 4175 % the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w. 4176 \def\itemcontents{#1}% 4177 \setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}% 4178 % 4179 % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet. 4180 \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi 4181 % 4182 \let\item=\itemizeitem 4183} 4184 4185% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate. 4186% 4187\def\itemizeitem{% 4188 \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations 4189 {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break 4190 {% 4191 % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a 4192 % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have 4193 % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero 4194 % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the 4195 % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there 4196 % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much 4197 % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least 4198 % that's the theory. 4199 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi 4200 \noindent 4201 \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}% 4202 % 4203 \ifinner\else 4204 \vadjust{\penalty 1200}% not good to break after first line of item. 4205 \fi 4206 % We can be in inner vertical mode in a footnote, although an 4207 % @itemize looks awful there. 4208 }% 4209 \flushcr 4210} 4211 4212% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in 4213% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. 4214% 4215\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% 4216 4217% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, 4218% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No 4219% argument is the same as `1'. 4220% 4221\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} 4222\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% 4223 % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. 4224 \def\thearg{#1}% 4225 \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi 4226 % 4227 % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a 4228 % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. 4229 % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. 4230 % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at 4231 % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) 4232 \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark 4233 \ifx\rest\empty 4234 % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. 4235 % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. 4236 % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and 4237 % not equal to itself. 4238 % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. 4239 % 4240 % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from 4241 % continuing to look for a <number>. 4242 % 4243 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax 4244 \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) 4245 \else 4246 % It's a letter. 4247 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax 4248 \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter 4249 \else 4250 \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter 4251 \fi 4252 \fi 4253 \else 4254 % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. 4255 \numericenumerate 4256 \fi 4257} 4258 4259% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is 4260% given in \thearg. 4261% 4262\def\numericenumerate{% 4263 \itemno = \thearg 4264 \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% 4265} 4266 4267% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. 4268\def\lowercaseenumerate{% 4269 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 4270 \startenumeration{% 4271 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 4272 \ifnum\itemno=0 4273 \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 4274 alphabet}% 4275 \fi 4276 \char\lccode\itemno 4277 }% 4278} 4279 4280% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. 4281\def\uppercaseenumerate{% 4282 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 4283 \startenumeration{% 4284 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 4285 \ifnum\itemno=0 4286 \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 4287 alphabet} 4288 \fi 4289 \char\uccode\itemno 4290 }% 4291} 4292 4293% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the 4294% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in 4295% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. 4296% 4297\def\startenumeration#1{% 4298 \advance\itemno by -1 4299 \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr 4300} 4301 4302 4303% @multitable macros 4304 4305% Macros used to set up halign preamble: 4306% 4307\let\endsetuptable\relax 4308\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} 4309\let\columnfractions\relax 4310\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} 4311\newif\ifsetpercent 4312 4313% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might 4314% be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is. 4315% 4316\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {% 4317 \global\advance\colcount by 1 4318 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}% 4319 \setuptable 4320} 4321 4322\newcount\colcount 4323\def\setuptable#1{% 4324 \def\firstarg{#1}% 4325 \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable 4326 \let\go = \relax 4327 \else 4328 \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions 4329 \global\setpercenttrue 4330 \else 4331 \ifsetpercent 4332 \let\go\pickupwholefraction 4333 \else 4334 \global\advance\colcount by 1 4335 \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a 4336 % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway. 4337 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% 4338 \fi 4339 \fi 4340 \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction 4341 % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so 4342 % we'll always have a period there to be parsed. 4343 \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% 4344 \else 4345 \let\go = \setuptable 4346 \fi% 4347 \fi 4348 \go 4349} 4350 4351% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. Assignments 4352% have to be global since we are inside the implicit group of an 4353% alignment entry. \everycr below resets \everytab so we don't have to 4354% undo it ourselves. 4355\def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable 4356\def\headitem{% 4357 \checkenv\multitable 4358 \crcr 4359 \gdef\headitemcrhook{\nobreak}% attempt to avoid page break after headings 4360 \global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs 4361 \the\everytab % for the first item 4362}% 4363% 4364% default for tables with no headings. 4365\let\headitemcrhook=\relax 4366% 4367\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}% 4368 4369\newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab. 4370% 4371\envdef\multitable{% 4372 \vskip\parskip 4373 \startsavinginserts 4374 % 4375 % @item within a multitable starts a normal row. 4376 % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries 4377 % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka 4378 % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize. 4379 \def\item{\crcr}% 4380 % 4381 \tolerance=9500 4382 \hbadness=9500 4383 \parskip=0pt 4384 \parindent=6pt 4385 \overfullrule=0pt 4386 \global\colcount=0 4387 % 4388 \everycr = {% 4389 \noalign{% 4390 \global\everytab={}% Reset from possible headitem. 4391 \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter. 4392 % 4393 % Check for saved footnotes, etc.: 4394 \checkinserts 4395 % 4396 % Perhaps a \nobreak, then reset: 4397 \headitemcrhook 4398 \global\let\headitemcrhook=\relax 4399 }% 4400 }% 4401 % 4402 \parsearg\domultitable 4403} 4404\def\domultitable#1{% 4405 % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: 4406 \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable 4407 % 4408 % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will 4409 % be used as many times as user calls for columns. 4410 % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and 4411 % continue for many paragraphs if desired. 4412 \halign\bgroup &% 4413 \global\advance\colcount by 1 4414 \strut 4415 \vtop{% 4416 \advance\hsize by -1\leftskip 4417 % Find the correct column width 4418 \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname 4419 % 4420 \rightskip=0pt 4421 \ifnum\colcount=1 4422 \advance\hsize by\leftskip % Add indent of surrounding text 4423 \else 4424 % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other. 4425 \leftskip=12pt 4426 \ifsetpercent \else 4427 % If a template has been used 4428 \advance\hsize by \leftskip 4429 \fi 4430 \fi 4431 \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\strut 4432 }\cr 4433} 4434\def\Emultitable{% 4435 \crcr 4436 \egroup % end the \halign 4437 \global\setpercentfalse 4438} 4439 4440 4441\message{conditionals,} 4442 4443% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext, 4444% @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't 4445% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we 4446% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't 4447% attempt to close an environment group. 4448% 4449\def\makecond#1{% 4450 \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax 4451 \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1 4452} 4453\makecond{iftex} 4454\makecond{ifnotdocbook} 4455\makecond{ifnothtml} 4456\makecond{ifnotinfo} 4457\makecond{ifnotplaintext} 4458\makecond{ifnotxml} 4459 4460% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like. 4461% 4462\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} 4463\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}} 4464\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}} 4465\def\html{\doignore{html}} 4466\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}} 4467\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} 4468\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} 4469\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} 4470\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}} 4471\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}} 4472\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} 4473\def\menu{\doignore{menu}} 4474\def\xml{\doignore{xml}} 4475 4476% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals. 4477% 4478% A count to remember the depth of nesting. 4479\newcount\doignorecount 4480 4481\def\doignore#1{\begingroup 4482 % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode: 4483 \obeylines 4484 \catcode`\@ = \other 4485 \catcode`\{ = \other 4486 \catcode`\} = \other 4487 % 4488 % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. 4489 \spaceisspace 4490 % 4491 % Count number of #1's that we've seen. 4492 \doignorecount = 0 4493 % 4494 % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'. 4495 \dodoignore{#1}% 4496} 4497 4498{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source. 4499 \obeylines % 4500 % 4501 \gdef\dodoignore#1{% 4502 % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'. 4503 % 4504 % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'. 4505 \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{% 4506 \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}% 4507 % 4508 % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a 4509 % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for 4510 % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.) 4511 \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}% 4512 % 4513 % And now expand that command. 4514 \doignoretext ^^M% 4515 }% 4516} 4517 4518\def\doignoreyyy#1{% 4519 \def\temp{#1}% 4520 \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found. 4521 \let\next\doignoretextzzz 4522 \else % Found a nested condition, ... 4523 \advance\doignorecount by 1 4524 \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another. 4525 % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example). 4526 \fi 4527 \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro. 4528} 4529 4530% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_". 4531% 4532\def\doignoretextzzz#1{% 4533 \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end. 4534 \let\next\enddoignore 4535 \else % Still inside a nested condition. 4536 \advance\doignorecount by -1 4537 \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end. 4538 \fi 4539 \next 4540} 4541 4542% Finish off ignored text. 4543{ \obeylines% 4544 % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim 4545 % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional 4546 % would result in a blank line in the output. 4547 \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% 4548} 4549 4550 4551% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. 4552% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. 4553% 4554% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be 4555% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our 4556% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we 4557% didn't need it. 4558% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10. 4559% 4560\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} 4561\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% 4562 {% 4563 \makevalueexpandable 4564 \def\temp{#2}% 4565 \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}% 4566 \ifx\temp\empty 4567 \next{}% 4568 \else 4569 \setzzz#2\endsetzzz 4570 \fi 4571 }% 4572} 4573% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. 4574\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}} 4575 4576% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. 4577% 4578\parseargdef\clear{% 4579 {% 4580 \makevalueexpandable 4581 \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax 4582 }% 4583} 4584 4585% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. 4586\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx} 4587\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} 4588{ 4589 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active 4590 % 4591 \gdef\makevalueexpandable{% 4592 \let\value = \expandablevalue 4593 % We don't want these characters active, ... 4594 \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other 4595 % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if 4596 % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though. 4597 % So \let them to their normal equivalents. 4598 \let-\normaldash \let_\normalunderscore 4599 } 4600} 4601 4602\def\expandablevalue#1{% 4603 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 4604 {[No value for ``#1'']}% 4605 \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}% 4606 \else 4607 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4608 \fi 4609} 4610 4611% Like \expandablevalue, but completely expandable (the \message in the 4612% definition above operates at the execution level of TeX). Used when 4613% writing to auxiliary files, due to the expansion that \write does. 4614% If flag is undefined, pass through an unexpanded @value command: maybe it 4615% will be set by the time it is read back in. 4616% 4617% NB flag names containing - or _ may not work here. 4618\def\dummyvalue#1{% 4619 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 4620 \string\value{#1}% 4621 \else 4622 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4623 \fi 4624} 4625 4626% Used for @value's in index entries to form the sort key: expand the @value 4627% if possible, otherwise sort late. 4628\def\indexnofontsvalue#1{% 4629 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 4630 ZZZZZZZ% 4631 \else 4632 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4633 \fi 4634} 4635 4636% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined 4637% with @set. 4638% 4639% To get the special treatment we need for `@end ifset,' we call 4640% \makecond and then redefine. 4641% 4642\makecond{ifset} 4643\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}} 4644\def\doifset#1#2{% 4645 {% 4646 \makevalueexpandable 4647 \let\next=\empty 4648 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax 4649 #1% If not set, redefine \next. 4650 \fi 4651 \expandafter 4652 }\next 4653} 4654\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}} 4655 4656% @ifclear VAR ... @end executes the `...' iff VAR has never been 4657% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. 4658% 4659% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the 4660% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set, 4661% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail. 4662% 4663\makecond{ifclear} 4664\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}} 4665\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}} 4666 4667% @ifcommandisdefined CMD ... @end executes the `...' if CMD (written 4668% without the @) is in fact defined. We can only feasibly check at the 4669% TeX level, so something like `mathcode' is going to considered 4670% defined even though it is not a Texinfo command. 4671% 4672\makecond{ifcommanddefined} 4673\def\ifcommanddefined{\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\let\next=\ifcmddefinedfail}}} 4674% 4675\def\doifcmddefined#1#2{{% 4676 \makevalueexpandable 4677 \let\next=\empty 4678 \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax 4679 #1% If not defined, \let\next as above. 4680 \fi 4681 \expandafter 4682 }\next 4683} 4684\def\ifcmddefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommanddefined}} 4685 4686% @ifcommandnotdefined CMD ... handled similar to @ifclear above. 4687\makecond{ifcommandnotdefined} 4688\def\ifcommandnotdefined{% 4689 \parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\else \let\next=\ifcmdnotdefinedfail}}} 4690\def\ifcmdnotdefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommandnotdefined}} 4691 4692% Set the `txicommandconditionals' variable, so documents have a way to 4693% test if the @ifcommand...defined conditionals are available. 4694\set txicommandconditionals 4695 4696% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file 4697% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. 4698\let\dircategory=\comment 4699 4700% @defininfoenclose. 4701\let\definfoenclose=\comment 4702 4703 4704\message{indexing,} 4705% Index generation facilities 4706 4707% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite 4708% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's. 4709\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}} 4710 4711% \newindex {foo} defines an index named IX. 4712% It automatically defines \IXindex such that 4713% \IXindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index IX. 4714% It also defines \IXindfile to be the number of the output channel for 4715% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is IX. 4716% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long 4717% for the sake of vms. 4718% 4719\def\newindex#1{% 4720 \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0 4721 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index 4722 \noexpand\doindex{#1}} 4723} 4724 4725% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} 4726% 4727\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} 4728 4729% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. 4730% 4731\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} 4732% 4733\def\newcodeindex#1{% 4734 \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0 4735 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% 4736 \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% 4737} 4738 4739% The default indices: 4740\newindex{cp}% concepts, 4741\newcodeindex{fn}% functions, 4742\newcodeindex{vr}% variables, 4743\newcodeindex{tp}% types, 4744\newcodeindex{ky}% keys 4745\newcodeindex{pg}% and programs. 4746 4747 4748% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. 4749% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. 4750% 4751% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo 4752% inside @code. 4753% 4754\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} 4755\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} 4756 4757% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo), 4758% #3 the target index (bar). 4759\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% 4760 \requireopenindexfile{#3}% 4761 % redefine \fooindfile: 4762 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname 4763 \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp 4764 % redefine \fooindex: 4765 \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% 4766} 4767 4768% Define \doindex, the driver for all index macros. 4769% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, 4770% and it is the two-letter name of the index. 4771 4772\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\doindexxxx} 4773\def\doindexxxx #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} 4774 4775% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. 4776\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\docodeindexxxx} 4777\def\docodeindexxxx #1{\docind{\indexname}{#1}} 4778 4779 4780% Used for the aux, toc and index files to prevent expansion of Texinfo 4781% commands. 4782% 4783\def\atdummies{% 4784 \definedummyletter\@% 4785 \definedummyletter\ % 4786 \definedummyletter\{% 4787 \definedummyletter\}% 4788 \definedummyletter\&% 4789 % 4790 % Do the redefinitions. 4791 \definedummies 4792 \otherbackslash 4793} 4794 4795% \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively 4796% preventing its expansion. This is used only for control words, 4797% not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for 4798% control characters, but is needed to separate the control word 4799% from whatever follows. 4800% 4801% These can be used both for control words that take an argument and 4802% those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then 4803% that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever). 4804% 4805% For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the 4806% space. 4807% 4808\def\definedummyword #1{\def#1{\string#1\space}}% 4809\def\definedummyletter#1{\def#1{\string#1}}% 4810\let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter 4811 4812% Called from \atdummies to prevent the expansion of commands. 4813% 4814\def\definedummies{% 4815 % 4816 \let\commondummyword\definedummyword 4817 \let\commondummyletter\definedummyletter 4818 \let\commondummyaccent\definedummyaccent 4819 \commondummiesnofonts 4820 % 4821 \definedummyletter\_% 4822 \definedummyletter\-% 4823 % 4824 % Non-English letters. 4825 \definedummyword\AA 4826 \definedummyword\AE 4827 \definedummyword\DH 4828 \definedummyword\L 4829 \definedummyword\O 4830 \definedummyword\OE 4831 \definedummyword\TH 4832 \definedummyword\aa 4833 \definedummyword\ae 4834 \definedummyword\dh 4835 \definedummyword\exclamdown 4836 \definedummyword\l 4837 \definedummyword\o 4838 \definedummyword\oe 4839 \definedummyword\ordf 4840 \definedummyword\ordm 4841 \definedummyword\questiondown 4842 \definedummyword\ss 4843 \definedummyword\th 4844 % 4845 % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do. 4846 \definedummyword\bf 4847 \definedummyword\gtr 4848 \definedummyword\hat 4849 \definedummyword\less 4850 \definedummyword\sf 4851 \definedummyword\sl 4852 \definedummyword\tclose 4853 \definedummyword\tt 4854 % 4855 \definedummyword\LaTeX 4856 \definedummyword\TeX 4857 % 4858 % Assorted special characters. 4859 \definedummyword\ampchar 4860 \definedummyword\atchar 4861 \definedummyword\arrow 4862 \definedummyword\backslashchar 4863 \definedummyword\bullet 4864 \definedummyword\comma 4865 \definedummyword\copyright 4866 \definedummyword\registeredsymbol 4867 \definedummyword\dots 4868 \definedummyword\enddots 4869 \definedummyword\entrybreak 4870 \definedummyword\equiv 4871 \definedummyword\error 4872 \definedummyword\euro 4873 \definedummyword\expansion 4874 \definedummyword\geq 4875 \definedummyword\guillemetleft 4876 \definedummyword\guillemetright 4877 \definedummyword\guilsinglleft 4878 \definedummyword\guilsinglright 4879 \definedummyword\lbracechar 4880 \definedummyword\leq 4881 \definedummyword\mathopsup 4882 \definedummyword\minus 4883 \definedummyword\ogonek 4884 \definedummyword\pounds 4885 \definedummyword\point 4886 \definedummyword\print 4887 \definedummyword\quotedblbase 4888 \definedummyword\quotedblleft 4889 \definedummyword\quotedblright 4890 \definedummyword\quoteleft 4891 \definedummyword\quoteright 4892 \definedummyword\quotesinglbase 4893 \definedummyword\rbracechar 4894 \definedummyword\result 4895 \definedummyword\sub 4896 \definedummyword\sup 4897 \definedummyword\textdegree 4898 % 4899 \definedummyword\subentry 4900 % 4901 % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write. 4902 \macrolist 4903 \let\value\dummyvalue 4904 % 4905 \normalturnoffactive 4906} 4907 4908% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \definedummies and \indexnofonts. 4909% Define \commondummyletter, \commondummyaccent and \commondummyword before 4910% using. Used for accents, font commands, and various control letters. 4911% 4912\def\commondummiesnofonts{% 4913 % Control letters and accents. 4914 \commondummyletter\!% 4915 \commondummyaccent\"% 4916 \commondummyaccent\'% 4917 \commondummyletter\*% 4918 \commondummyaccent\,% 4919 \commondummyletter\.% 4920 \commondummyletter\/% 4921 \commondummyletter\:% 4922 \commondummyaccent\=% 4923 \commondummyletter\?% 4924 \commondummyaccent\^% 4925 \commondummyaccent\`% 4926 \commondummyaccent\~% 4927 \commondummyword\u 4928 \commondummyword\v 4929 \commondummyword\H 4930 \commondummyword\dotaccent 4931 \commondummyword\ogonek 4932 \commondummyword\ringaccent 4933 \commondummyword\tieaccent 4934 \commondummyword\ubaraccent 4935 \commondummyword\udotaccent 4936 \commondummyword\dotless 4937 % 4938 % Texinfo font commands. 4939 \commondummyword\b 4940 \commondummyword\i 4941 \commondummyword\r 4942 \commondummyword\sansserif 4943 \commondummyword\sc 4944 \commondummyword\slanted 4945 \commondummyword\t 4946 % 4947 % Commands that take arguments. 4948 \commondummyword\abbr 4949 \commondummyword\acronym 4950 \commondummyword\anchor 4951 \commondummyword\cite 4952 \commondummyword\code 4953 \commondummyword\command 4954 \commondummyword\dfn 4955 \commondummyword\dmn 4956 \commondummyword\email 4957 \commondummyword\emph 4958 \commondummyword\env 4959 \commondummyword\file 4960 \commondummyword\image 4961 \commondummyword\indicateurl 4962 \commondummyword\inforef 4963 \commondummyword\kbd 4964 \commondummyword\key 4965 \commondummyword\math 4966 \commondummyword\option 4967 \commondummyword\pxref 4968 \commondummyword\ref 4969 \commondummyword\samp 4970 \commondummyword\strong 4971 \commondummyword\tie 4972 \commondummyword\U 4973 \commondummyword\uref 4974 \commondummyword\url 4975 \commondummyword\var 4976 \commondummyword\verb 4977 \commondummyword\w 4978 \commondummyword\xref 4979} 4980 4981\let\indexlbrace\relax 4982\let\indexrbrace\relax 4983\let\indexatchar\relax 4984\let\indexbackslash\relax 4985 4986{\catcode`\@=0 4987\catcode`\\=13 4988 @gdef@backslashdisappear{@def\{}} 4989} 4990 4991{ 4992\catcode`\<=13 4993\catcode`\-=13 4994\catcode`\`=13 4995 \gdef\indexnonalnumdisappear{% 4996 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlquoteignore\endcsname\relax\else 4997 % @set txiindexlquoteignore makes us ignore left quotes in the sort term. 4998 % (Introduced for FSFS 2nd ed.) 4999 \let`=\empty 5000 \fi 5001 % 5002 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexbackslashignore\endcsname\relax\else 5003 \backslashdisappear 5004 \fi 5005 % 5006 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexhyphenignore\endcsname\relax\else 5007 \def-{}% 5008 \fi 5009 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlessthanignore\endcsname\relax\else 5010 \def<{}% 5011 \fi 5012 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexatsignignore\endcsname\relax\else 5013 \def\@{}% 5014 \fi 5015 } 5016 5017 \gdef\indexnonalnumreappear{% 5018 \let-\normaldash 5019 \let<\normalless 5020 } 5021} 5022 5023 5024% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index 5025% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all 5026% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string 5027% would be for a given command (usually its argument). 5028% 5029\def\indexnofonts{% 5030 % Accent commands should become @asis. 5031 \def\commondummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}% 5032 % We can just ignore other control letters. 5033 \def\commondummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}% 5034 % All control words become @asis by default; overrides below. 5035 \let\commondummyword\commondummyaccent 5036 \commondummiesnofonts 5037 % 5038 % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command 5039 % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc. 5040 % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands. 5041 %\let\tt=\asis 5042 % 5043 \def\ { }% 5044 \def\@{@}% 5045 \def\_{\normalunderscore}% 5046 \def\-{}% @- shouldn't affect sorting 5047 % 5048 \uccode`\1=`\{ \uppercase{\def\{{1}}% 5049 \uccode`\1=`\} \uppercase{\def\}{1}}% 5050 \let\lbracechar\{% 5051 \let\rbracechar\}% 5052 % 5053 % Non-English letters. 5054 \def\AA{AA}% 5055 \def\AE{AE}% 5056 \def\DH{DZZ}% 5057 \def\L{L}% 5058 \def\OE{OE}% 5059 \def\O{O}% 5060 \def\TH{TH}% 5061 \def\aa{aa}% 5062 \def\ae{ae}% 5063 \def\dh{dzz}% 5064 \def\exclamdown{!}% 5065 \def\l{l}% 5066 \def\oe{oe}% 5067 \def\ordf{a}% 5068 \def\ordm{o}% 5069 \def\o{o}% 5070 \def\questiondown{?}% 5071 \def\ss{ss}% 5072 \def\th{th}% 5073 % 5074 \let\do\indexnofontsdef 5075 % 5076 \do\LaTeX{LaTeX}% 5077 \do\TeX{TeX}% 5078 % 5079 % Assorted special characters. 5080 \do\atchar{@}% 5081 \do\arrow{->}% 5082 \do\bullet{bullet}% 5083 \do\comma{,}% 5084 \do\copyright{copyright}% 5085 \do\dots{...}% 5086 \do\enddots{...}% 5087 \do\equiv{==}% 5088 \do\error{error}% 5089 \do\euro{euro}% 5090 \do\expansion{==>}% 5091 \do\geq{>=}% 5092 \do\guillemetleft{<<}% 5093 \do\guillemetright{>>}% 5094 \do\guilsinglleft{<}% 5095 \do\guilsinglright{>}% 5096 \do\leq{<=}% 5097 \do\lbracechar{\{}% 5098 \do\minus{-}% 5099 \do\point{.}% 5100 \do\pounds{pounds}% 5101 \do\print{-|}% 5102 \do\quotedblbase{"}% 5103 \do\quotedblleft{"}% 5104 \do\quotedblright{"}% 5105 \do\quoteleft{`}% 5106 \do\quoteright{'}% 5107 \do\quotesinglbase{,}% 5108 \do\rbracechar{\}}% 5109 \do\registeredsymbol{R}% 5110 \do\result{=>}% 5111 \do\textdegree{o}% 5112 % 5113 % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present). 5114 % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now. 5115 % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up 5116 % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry 5117 % that starts with \. 5118 % 5119 % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them 5120 % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that 5121 % goes to end-of-line is not handled. 5122 % 5123 \macrolist 5124 \let\value\indexnofontsvalue 5125} 5126 5127% Give the control sequence a definition that removes the {} that follows 5128% its use, e.g. @AA{} -> AA 5129\def\indexnofontsdef#1#2{\def#1##1{#2}}% 5130 5131 5132 5133 5134% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text. 5135\def\doind#1#2{% 5136 \iflinks 5137 {% 5138 % 5139 \requireopenindexfile{#1}% 5140 \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% 5141 % 5142 \def\indextext{#2}% 5143 \safewhatsit\doindwrite 5144 }% 5145 \fi 5146} 5147 5148% Same as \doind, but for code indices 5149\def\docind#1#2{% 5150 \iflinks 5151 {% 5152 % 5153 \requireopenindexfile{#1}% 5154 \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% 5155 % 5156 \def\indextext{#2}% 5157 \safewhatsit\docindwrite 5158 }% 5159 \fi 5160} 5161 5162% Check if an index file has been opened, and if not, open it. 5163\def\requireopenindexfile#1{% 5164\ifnum\csname #1indfile\endcsname=0 5165 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname 5166 \edef\suffix{#1}% 5167 % A .fls suffix would conflict with the file extension for the output 5168 % of -recorder, so use .f1s instead. 5169 \ifx\suffix\indexisfl\def\suffix{f1}\fi 5170 % Open the file 5171 \immediate\openout\csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.\suffix 5172 % Using \immediate above here prevents an object entering into the current 5173 % box, which could confound checks such as those in \safewhatsit for 5174 % preceding skips. 5175 \typeout{Writing index file \jobname.\suffix}% 5176\fi} 5177\def\indexisfl{fl} 5178 5179% Definition for writing index entry sort key. 5180{ 5181\catcode`\-=13 5182\gdef\indexwritesortas{% 5183 \begingroup 5184 \indexnonalnumreappear 5185 \indexwritesortasxxx} 5186\gdef\indexwritesortasxxx#1{% 5187 \xdef\indexsortkey{#1}\endgroup} 5188} 5189 5190\def\indexwriteseealso#1{ 5191 \gdef\pagenumbertext{\string\seealso{#1}}% 5192} 5193\def\indexwriteseeentry#1{ 5194 \gdef\pagenumbertext{\string\seeentry{#1}}% 5195} 5196 5197% The default definitions 5198\def\sortas#1{}% 5199\def\seealso#1{\i{\putwordSeeAlso}\ #1}% for sorted index file only 5200\def\putwordSeeAlso{See also} 5201\def\seeentry#1{\i{\putwordSee}\ #1}% for sorted index file only 5202 5203 5204% Given index entry text like "aaa @subentry bbb @sortas{ZZZ}": 5205% * Set \bracedtext to "{aaa}{bbb}" 5206% * Set \fullindexsortkey to "aaa @subentry ZZZ" 5207% * If @seealso occurs, set \pagenumbertext 5208% 5209\def\splitindexentry#1{% 5210 \gdef\fullindexsortkey{}% 5211 \xdef\bracedtext{}% 5212 \def\sep{}% 5213 \def\seealso##1{}% 5214 \def\seeentry##1{}% 5215 \expandafter\doindexsegment#1\subentry\finish\subentry 5216} 5217 5218% append the results from the next segment 5219\def\doindexsegment#1\subentry{% 5220 \def\segment{#1}% 5221 \ifx\segment\isfinish 5222 \else 5223 % 5224 % Fully expand the segment, throwing away any @sortas directives, and 5225 % trim spaces. 5226 \edef\trimmed{\segment}% 5227 \edef\trimmed{\expandafter\eatspaces\expandafter{\trimmed}}% 5228 \ifincodeindex 5229 \edef\trimmed{\noexpand\code{\trimmed}}% 5230 \fi 5231 % 5232 \xdef\bracedtext{\bracedtext{\trimmed}}% 5233 % 5234 % Get the string to sort by. Process the segment with all 5235 % font commands turned off. 5236 \bgroup 5237 \let\sortas\indexwritesortas 5238 \let\seealso\indexwriteseealso 5239 \let\seeentry\indexwriteseeentry 5240 \indexnofonts 5241 % The braces around the commands are recognized by texindex. 5242 \def\lbracechar{{\string\indexlbrace}}% 5243 \def\rbracechar{{\string\indexrbrace}}% 5244 \let\{=\lbracechar 5245 \let\}=\rbracechar 5246 \def\@{{\string\indexatchar}}% 5247 \def\atchar##1{\@}% 5248 \def\backslashchar{{\string\indexbackslash}}% 5249 \uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\let~\backslashchar}% 5250 % 5251 \let\indexsortkey\empty 5252 \global\let\pagenumbertext\empty 5253 % Execute the segment and throw away the typeset output. This executes 5254 % any @sortas or @seealso commands in this segment. 5255 \setbox\dummybox = \hbox{\segment}% 5256 \ifx\indexsortkey\empty{% 5257 \indexnonalnumdisappear 5258 \xdef\trimmed{\segment}% 5259 \xdef\trimmed{\expandafter\eatspaces\expandafter{\trimmed}}% 5260 \xdef\indexsortkey{\trimmed}% 5261 \ifx\indexsortkey\empty\xdef\indexsortkey{ }\fi 5262 }\fi 5263 % 5264 % Append to \fullindexsortkey. 5265 \edef\tmp{\gdef\noexpand\fullindexsortkey{% 5266 \fullindexsortkey\sep\indexsortkey}}% 5267 \tmp 5268 \egroup 5269 \def\sep{\subentry}% 5270 % 5271 \expandafter\doindexsegment 5272 \fi 5273} 5274\def\isfinish{\finish}% 5275\newbox\dummybox % used above 5276 5277\let\subentry\relax 5278 5279% Use \ instead of @ in index files. To support old texi2dvi and texindex. 5280% This works without changing the escape character used in the toc or aux 5281% files because the index entries are fully expanded here, and \string uses 5282% the current value of \escapechar. 5283\def\escapeisbackslash{\escapechar=`\\} 5284 5285% Use \ in index files by default. texi2dvi didn't support @ as the escape 5286% character (as it checked for "\entry" in the files, and not "@entry"). When 5287% the new version of texi2dvi has had a chance to become more prevalent, then 5288% the escape character can change back to @ again. This should be an easy 5289% change to make now because both @ and \ are only used as escape characters in 5290% index files, never standing for themselves. 5291% 5292\set txiindexescapeisbackslash 5293 5294% Write the entry in \indextext to the index file. 5295% 5296 5297\newif\ifincodeindex 5298\def\doindwrite{\incodeindexfalse\doindwritex} 5299\def\docindwrite{\incodeindextrue\doindwritex} 5300 5301\def\doindwritex{% 5302 \maybemarginindex 5303 % 5304 \atdummies 5305 % 5306 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexescapeisbackslash\endcsname\relax\else 5307 \escapeisbackslash 5308 \fi 5309 % 5310 % For texindex which always views { and } as separators. 5311 \def\{{\lbracechar{}}% 5312 \def\}{\rbracechar{}}% 5313 \uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\def~{\backslashchar{}}}% 5314 % 5315 % Split the entry into primary entry and any subentries, and get the index 5316 % sort key. 5317 \splitindexentry\indextext 5318 % 5319 % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and 5320 % the original text, including any font commands. We write 5321 % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the 5322 % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s 5323 % sorted result. 5324 % 5325 \edef\temp{% 5326 \write\writeto{% 5327 \string\entry{\fullindexsortkey}% 5328 {\ifx\pagenumbertext\empty\noexpand\folio\else\pagenumbertext\fi}% 5329 \bracedtext}% 5330 }% 5331 \temp 5332} 5333 5334% Put the index entry in the margin if desired (undocumented). 5335\def\maybemarginindex{% 5336 \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else 5337 \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \relax\indextext}}% 5338 \fi 5339} 5340\let\SETmarginindex=\relax 5341 5342 5343% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit: 5344% 5345% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it 5346% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting 5347% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the 5348% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that 5349% sequences like this: 5350% @end defun 5351% @tindex whatever 5352% @defun ... 5353% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the 5354% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of 5355% the previous defun. 5356% 5357% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We 5358% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. 5359% 5360% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. 5361% 5362% But wait, there is a catch there: 5363% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not 5364% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts 5365% of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual 5366% representation of the skip. 5367% 5368% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that 5369% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter). 5370% 5371\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname} 5372% 5373\newskip\whatsitskip 5374\newcount\whatsitpenalty 5375% 5376% ..., ready, GO: 5377% 5378\def\safewhatsit#1{\ifhmode 5379 #1% 5380 \else 5381 % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously. 5382 \whatsitskip = \lastskip 5383 \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}% 5384 \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty 5385 % 5386 % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a 5387 % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this 5388 % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a 5389 % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential 5390 % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed. 5391 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 5392 \else 5393 \vskip-\whatsitskip 5394 \fi 5395 % 5396 #1% 5397 % 5398 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 5399 % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and 5400 % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want 5401 % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various 5402 % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any 5403 % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example: 5404 % @deffn deffn-whatever 5405 % @vindex index-whatever 5406 % Description. 5407 % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit 5408 % and the "Description." paragraph. 5409 \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi 5410 \else 5411 % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip, 5412 % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item 5413 % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak. 5414 \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip 5415 \fi 5416\fi} 5417 5418% The index entry written in the file actually looks like 5419% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} 5420% or 5421% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} 5422% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files 5423% containing these kinds of lines: 5424% \initial {c} 5425% before the first topic whose initial is c 5426% \entry {topic}{pagelist} 5427% for a topic that is used without subtopics 5428% \primary {topic} 5429% \entry {topic}{} 5430% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics 5431% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} 5432% for each subtopic. 5433% \secondary {subtopic}{} 5434% for a subtopic with sub-subtopics 5435% \tertiary {subtopic}{subsubtopic}{pagelist} 5436% for each sub-subtopic. 5437 5438% Define the user-accessible indexing commands 5439% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. 5440 5441\def\findex {\fnindex} 5442\def\kindex {\kyindex} 5443\def\cindex {\cpindex} 5444\def\vindex {\vrindex} 5445\def\tindex {\tpindex} 5446\def\pindex {\pgindex} 5447 5448% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. 5449 5450% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. 5451% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). 5452% 5453\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup 5454 \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% 5455 % 5456 \smallfonts \rm 5457 \tolerance = 9500 5458 \plainfrenchspacing 5459 \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression. 5460 % 5461 % See comment in \requireopenindexfile. 5462 \def\indexname{#1}\ifx\indexname\indexisfl\def\indexname{f1}\fi 5463 % 5464 % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. 5465 \openin 1 \jobname.\indexname s 5466 \ifeof 1 5467 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, 5468 % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the 5469 % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure 5470 % there is some text. 5471 \putwordIndexNonexistent 5472 \typeout{No file \jobname.\indexname s.}% 5473 \else 5474 % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof 5475 % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so 5476 % it can discover if there is anything in it. 5477 \read 1 to \thisline 5478 \ifeof 1 5479 \putwordIndexIsEmpty 5480 \else 5481 \expandafter\printindexzz\thisline\relax\relax\finish% 5482 \fi 5483 \fi 5484 \closein 1 5485\endgroup} 5486 5487% If the index file starts with a backslash, forgo reading the index 5488% file altogether. If somebody upgrades texinfo.tex they may still have 5489% old index files using \ as the escape character. Reading this would 5490% at best lead to typesetting garbage, at worst a TeX syntax error. 5491\def\printindexzz#1#2\finish{% 5492 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexescapeisbackslash\endcsname\relax 5493 \uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\if\noexpand~}\noexpand#1 5494 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiskipindexfileswithbackslash\endcsname\relax 5495\errmessage{% 5496ERROR: A sorted index file in an obsolete format was skipped. 5497To fix this problem, please upgrade your version of 'texi2dvi' 5498or 'texi2pdf' to that at <https://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo>. 5499If you are using an old version of 'texindex' (part of the Texinfo 5500distribution), you may also need to upgrade to a newer version (at least 6.0). 5501You may be able to typeset the index if you run 5502'texindex \jobname.\indexname' yourself. 5503You could also try setting the 'txiindexescapeisbackslash' flag by 5504running a command like 5505'texi2dvi -t "@set txiindexescapeisbackslash" \jobname.texi'. If you do 5506this, Texinfo will try to use index files in the old format. 5507If you continue to have problems, deleting the index files and starting again 5508might help (with 'rm \jobname.?? \jobname.??s')% 5509}% 5510 \else 5511 (Skipped sorted index file in obsolete format) 5512 \fi 5513 \else 5514 \begindoublecolumns 5515 \input \jobname.\indexname s 5516 \enddoublecolumns 5517 \fi 5518 \else 5519 \begindoublecolumns 5520 \catcode`\\=0\relax 5521 % 5522 % Make @ an escape character to give macros a chance to work. This 5523 % should work because we (hopefully) don't otherwise use @ in index files. 5524 %\catcode`\@=12\relax 5525 \catcode`\@=0\relax 5526 \input \jobname.\indexname s 5527 \enddoublecolumns 5528 \fi 5529} 5530 5531% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. 5532% Change them to control the appearance of the index. 5533 5534{\catcode`\/=13 \catcode`\-=13 \catcode`\^=13 \catcode`\~=13 \catcode`\_=13 5535\catcode`\|=13 \catcode`\<=13 \catcode`\>=13 \catcode`\+=13 \catcode`\"=13 5536\catcode`\$=3 5537\gdef\initialglyphs{% 5538 % special control sequences used in the index sort key 5539 \let\indexlbrace\{% 5540 \let\indexrbrace\}% 5541 \let\indexatchar\@% 5542 \def\indexbackslash{\math{\backslash}}% 5543 % 5544 % Some changes for non-alphabetic characters. Using the glyphs from the 5545 % math fonts looks more consistent than the typewriter font used elsewhere 5546 % for these characters. 5547 \uccode`\~=`\\ \uppercase{\def~{\math{\backslash}}} 5548 % 5549 % In case @\ is used for backslash 5550 \uppercase{\let\\=~} 5551 % Can't get bold backslash so don't use bold forward slash 5552 \catcode`\/=13 5553 \def/{{\secrmnotbold \normalslash}}% 5554 \def-{{\normaldash\normaldash}}% en dash `--' 5555 \def^{{\chapbf \normalcaret}}% 5556 \def~{{\chapbf \normaltilde}}% 5557 \def\_{% 5558 \leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }% 5559 \def|{$\vert$}% 5560 \def<{$\less$}% 5561 \def>{$\gtr$}% 5562 \def+{$\normalplus$}% 5563}} 5564 5565\def\initial{% 5566 \bgroup 5567 \initialglyphs 5568 \initialx 5569} 5570 5571\def\initialx#1{% 5572 % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. 5573 \removelastskip 5574 % 5575 % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. 5576 % The glue before the bonus allows a little bit of space at the 5577 % bottom of a column to reduce an increase in inter-line spacing. 5578 \nobreak 5579 \vskip 0pt plus 5\baselineskip 5580 \penalty -300 5581 \vskip 0pt plus -5\baselineskip 5582 % 5583 % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of 5584 % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column 5585 % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch 5586 % we need before each entry, but it's better. 5587 % 5588 % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. 5589 \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus 1\baselineskip 5590 \leftline{\secfonts \kern-0.05em \secbf #1}% 5591 % \secfonts is inside the argument of \leftline so that the change of 5592 % \baselineskip will not affect any glue inserted before the vbox that 5593 % \leftline creates. 5594 % Do our best not to break after the initial. 5595 \nobreak 5596 \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip 5597 \egroup % \initialglyphs 5598} 5599 5600\newdimen\entryrightmargin 5601\entryrightmargin=0pt 5602 5603% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and 5604% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index 5605% and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. 5606% 5607\def\entry{% 5608 \begingroup 5609 % 5610 % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't 5611 % affect previous text. 5612 \par 5613 % 5614 % No extra space above this paragraph. 5615 \parskip = 0in 5616 % 5617 % When reading the text of entry, convert explicit line breaks 5618 % from @* into spaces. The user might give these in long section 5619 % titles, for instance. 5620 \def\*{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}% 5621 \def\entrybreak{\hfil\break}% An undocumented command 5622 % 5623 % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter): 5624 \afterassignment\doentry 5625 \let\temp = 5626} 5627\def\entrybreak{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}% 5628\def\doentry{% 5629 % Save the text of the entry 5630 \global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup 5631 \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace. 5632 \noindent 5633 \aftergroup\finishentry 5634 % And now comes the text of the entry. 5635 % Not absorbing as a macro argument reduces the chance of problems 5636 % with catcodes occurring. 5637} 5638{\catcode`\@=11 5639\gdef\finishentry#1{% 5640 \egroup % end box A 5641 \dimen@ = \wd\boxA % Length of text of entry 5642 \global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup 5643 \unhbox\boxA 5644 % #1 is the page number. 5645 % 5646 % Get the width of the page numbers, and only use 5647 % leaders if they are present. 5648 \global\setbox\boxB = \hbox{#1}% 5649 \ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt 5650 \null\nobreak\hfill\ % 5651 \else 5652 % 5653 \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. 5654 % 5655 \ifpdforxetex 5656 \pdfgettoks#1.% 5657 \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable\the\toksA 5658 \else 5659 \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable #1% 5660 \fi 5661 \fi 5662 \egroup % end \boxA 5663 \ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt 5664 \noindent\unhbox\boxA\par 5665 \nobreak 5666 \else\bgroup 5667 % We want the text of the entries to be aligned to the left, and the 5668 % page numbers to be aligned to the right. 5669 % 5670 \parindent = 0pt 5671 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fil 5672 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus -1fill 5673 \rightskip = 0pt plus -1fil 5674 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fill 5675 % Cause last line, which could consist of page numbers on their own 5676 % if the list of page numbers is long, to be aligned to the right. 5677 \parfillskip=0pt plus -1fill 5678 % 5679 \advance\rightskip by \entryrightmargin 5680 % Determine how far we can stretch into the margin. 5681 % This allows, e.g., "Appendix H GNU Free Documentation License" to 5682 % fit on one line in @letterpaper format. 5683 \ifdim\entryrightmargin>2.1em 5684 \dimen@i=2.1em 5685 \else 5686 \dimen@i=0em 5687 \fi 5688 \advance \parfillskip by 0pt minus 1\dimen@i 5689 % 5690 \dimen@ii = \hsize 5691 \advance\dimen@ii by -1\leftskip 5692 \advance\dimen@ii by -1\entryrightmargin 5693 \advance\dimen@ii by 1\dimen@i 5694 \ifdim\wd\boxA > \dimen@ii % If the entry doesn't fit in one line 5695 \ifdim\dimen@ > 0.8\dimen@ii % due to long index text 5696 % Try to split the text roughly evenly. \dimen@ will be the length of 5697 % the first line. 5698 \dimen@ = 0.7\dimen@ 5699 \dimen@ii = \hsize 5700 \ifnum\dimen@>\dimen@ii 5701 % If the entry is too long (for example, if it needs more than 5702 % two lines), use all the space in the first line. 5703 \dimen@ = \dimen@ii 5704 \fi 5705 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill % ragged right 5706 \advance \dimen@ by 1\rightskip 5707 \parshape = 2 0pt \dimen@ 0em \dimen@ii 5708 % Ideally we'd add a finite glue at the end of the first line only, 5709 % instead of using \parshape with explicit line lengths, but TeX 5710 % doesn't seem to provide a way to do such a thing. 5711 % 5712 % Indent all lines but the first one. 5713 \advance\leftskip by 1em 5714 \advance\parindent by -1em 5715 \fi\fi 5716 \indent % start paragraph 5717 \unhbox\boxA 5718 % 5719 % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. 5720 \finalhyphendemerits = 0 5721 % 5722 % Word spacing - no stretch 5723 \spaceskip=\fontdimen2\font minus \fontdimen4\font 5724 % 5725 \linepenalty=1000 % Discourage line breaks. 5726 \hyphenpenalty=5000 % Discourage hyphenation. 5727 % 5728 \par % format the paragraph 5729 \egroup % The \vbox 5730 \fi 5731 \endgroup 5732}} 5733 5734\newskip\thinshrinkable 5735\skip\thinshrinkable=.15em minus .15em 5736 5737% Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em. 5738% The filll stretch here overpowers both the fil and fill stretch to push 5739% the page number to the right. 5740\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders 5741 \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1filll} 5742 5743 5744\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} 5745 5746\def\secondary{\indententry{0.5cm}} 5747\def\tertiary{\indententry{1cm}} 5748 5749\def\indententry#1#2#3{% 5750 \bgroup 5751 \leftskip=#1 5752 \entry{#2}{#3}% 5753 \egroup 5754} 5755 5756% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. 5757% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, 5758% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. 5759\catcode`\@=11 % private names 5760 5761\newbox\partialpage 5762\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize 5763 5764\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns 5765 % If not much space left on page, start a new page. 5766 \ifdim\pagetotal>0.8\vsize\vfill\eject\fi 5767 % 5768 % Grab any single-column material above us. 5769 \output = {% 5770 \savetopmark 5771 % 5772 \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% 5773 % Unvbox the main output page. 5774 \unvbox\PAGE 5775 \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip 5776 }% 5777 }% 5778 \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage 5779 % 5780 % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. 5781 \output = {\doublecolumnout}% 5782 % 5783 % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this 5784 % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 5785 % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple 5786 % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the 5787 % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. 5788 % 5789 % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between 5790 % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it 5791 % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant 5792 % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) 5793 % as it did when we hard-coded it. 5794 % 5795 % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we 5796 % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) 5797 % been clobbered. 5798 % 5799 \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize 5800 \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize 5801 \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 5802 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 5803 % 5804 % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal 5805 % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the 5806 % previous page. 5807 \advance\vsize by -\ht\partialpage 5808 \vsize = 2\vsize 5809 % 5810 % For the benefit of balancing columns 5811 \advance\baselineskip by 0pt plus 0.5pt 5812} 5813 5814% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except 5815% the last, which is done by \balancecolumns. 5816% 5817\def\doublecolumnout{% 5818 % 5819 \savetopmark 5820 \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth 5821 \dimen@ = \vsize 5822 \divide\dimen@ by 2 5823 % 5824 % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. 5825 \setbox0=\vsplit\PAGE to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit\PAGE to\dimen@ 5826 \global\advance\vsize by 2\ht\partialpage 5827 \onepageout\pagesofar % empty except for the first time we are called 5828 \unvbox\PAGE 5829 \penalty\outputpenalty 5830} 5831% 5832% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, 5833% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. 5834\def\pagesofar{% 5835 \unvbox\partialpage 5836 % 5837 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 5838 \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize 5839 \hbox to\txipagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% 5840} 5841 5842 5843% Finished with double columns. 5844\def\enddoublecolumns{% 5845 % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised 5846 % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the 5847 % following situation: 5848 % 5849 % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry. 5850 % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no 5851 % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last 5852 % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not 5853 % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following 5854 % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject 5855 % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output 5856 % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last 5857 % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which 5858 % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with 5859 % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as 5860 % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page 5861 % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the 5862 % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page 5863 % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final 5864 % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after 5865 % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns 5866 % and the final section into the vbox of \txipageheight (see 5867 % \pagebody), causing an overfull box. 5868 % 5869 % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the 5870 % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281). 5871 \penalty0 5872 % 5873 \output = {% 5874 % Split the last of the double-column material. 5875 \savetopmark 5876 \balancecolumns 5877 }% 5878 \eject % call the \output just set 5879 \ifdim\pagetotal=0pt 5880 % Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not 5881 % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal 5882 % definition right away. 5883 \global\output=\expandafter{\the\defaultoutput} 5884 % 5885 \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns 5886 % Leave the double-column material on the current page, no automatic 5887 % page break. 5888 \box\balancedcolumns 5889 % 5890 % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted 5891 % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column 5892 % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize. 5893 \global\vsize = \txipageheight % 5894 \pagegoal = \txipageheight % 5895 \else 5896 % We had some left-over material. This might happen when \doublecolumnout 5897 % is called in \balancecolumns. Try again. 5898 \expandafter\enddoublecolumns 5899 \fi 5900} 5901\newbox\balancedcolumns 5902\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{shouldnt see this}% 5903% 5904% Only called for the last of the double column material. \doublecolumnout 5905% does the others. 5906\def\balancecolumns{% 5907 \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox\PAGE}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. 5908 \dimen@ = \ht0 5909 \ifdim\dimen@<7\baselineskip 5910 % Don't split a short final column in two. 5911 \setbox2=\vbox{}% 5912 \global\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{\pagesofar}% 5913 \else 5914 % double the leading vertical space 5915 \advance\dimen@ by \topskip 5916 \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip 5917 \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to 5918 \dimen@ii = \dimen@ 5919 \splittopskip = \topskip 5920 % Loop until left column is at least as high as the right column. 5921 {% 5922 \vbadness = 10000 5923 \loop 5924 \global\setbox3 = \copy0 5925 \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ 5926 \ifdim\ht1<\ht3 5927 \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt 5928 \repeat 5929 }% 5930 % Now the left column is in box 1, and the right column in box 3. 5931 % 5932 % Check whether the left column has come out higher than the page itself. 5933 % (Note that we have doubled \vsize for the double columns, so 5934 % the actual height of the page is 0.5\vsize). 5935 \ifdim2\ht1>\vsize 5936 % It appears that we have been called upon to balance too much material. 5937 % Output some of it with \doublecolumnout, leaving the rest on the page. 5938 \setbox\PAGE=\box0 5939 \doublecolumnout 5940 \else 5941 % Compare the heights of the two columns. 5942 \ifdim4\ht1>5\ht3 5943 % Column heights are too different, so don't make their bottoms 5944 % flush with each other. 5945 \setbox2=\vbox to \ht1 {\unvbox3\vfill}% 5946 \setbox0=\vbox to \ht1 {\unvbox1\vfill}% 5947 \else 5948 % Make column bottoms flush with each other. 5949 \setbox2=\vbox to\ht1{\unvbox3\unskip}% 5950 \setbox0=\vbox to\ht1{\unvbox1\unskip}% 5951 \fi 5952 \global\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{\pagesofar}% 5953 \fi 5954 \fi 5955 % 5956} 5957\catcode`\@ = \other 5958 5959 5960\message{sectioning,} 5961% Chapters, sections, etc. 5962 5963% Let's start with @part. 5964\outer\parseargdef\part{\partzzz{#1}} 5965\def\partzzz#1{% 5966 \chapoddpage 5967 \null 5968 \vskip.3\vsize % move it down on the page a bit 5969 \begingroup 5970 \noindent \titlefonts\rm #1\par % the text 5971 \let\lastnode=\empty % no node to associate with 5972 \writetocentry{part}{#1}{}% but put it in the toc 5973 \headingsoff % no headline or footline on the part page 5974 % This outputs a mark at the end of the page that clears \thischapter 5975 % and \thissection, as is done in \startcontents. 5976 \let\pchapsepmacro\relax 5977 \chapmacro{}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% 5978 \chapoddpage 5979 \endgroup 5980} 5981 5982% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron. But we count the unnumbered 5983% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf 5984% outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter 5985% numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000 5986% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.) 5987\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000 5988\newcount\chapno 5989\newcount\secno \secno=0 5990\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 5991\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 5992 5993% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... 5994\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@ 5995% 5996% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} 5997% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple 5998% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual 5999% letter in the expansion, not just typeset. 6000% 6001\def\appendixletter{% 6002 \ifnum\appendixno=`A A% 6003 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B% 6004 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C% 6005 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D% 6006 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E% 6007 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F% 6008 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G% 6009 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H% 6010 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I% 6011 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J% 6012 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K% 6013 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L% 6014 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M% 6015 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N% 6016 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O% 6017 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P% 6018 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q% 6019 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R% 6020 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S% 6021 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T% 6022 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U% 6023 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V% 6024 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W% 6025 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X% 6026 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y% 6027 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z% 6028 % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is 6029 % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not 6030 % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out 6031 % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it. 6032 \else\char\the\appendixno 6033 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 6034 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} 6035 6036% Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number 6037% and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use 6038% these. @section does likewise. 6039\def\thischapter{} 6040\def\thischapternum{} 6041\def\thischaptername{} 6042\def\thissection{} 6043\def\thissectionnum{} 6044\def\thissectionname{} 6045 6046\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level 6047\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count 6048 6049% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. 6050\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} 6051 6052% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. 6053\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} 6054 6055% we only have subsub. 6056\chardef\maxseclevel = 3 6057% 6058% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too. 6059% To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in: 6060\chardef\unnlevel = \maxseclevel 6061% 6062% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not: 6063% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored. 6064\def\chapheadtype{N} 6065 6066% Choose a heading macro 6067% #1 is heading type 6068% #2 is heading level 6069% #3 is text for heading 6070\def\genhead#1#2#3{% 6071 % Compute the abs. sec. level: 6072 \absseclevel=#2 6073 \advance\absseclevel by \secbase 6074 % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range: 6075 \ifnum \absseclevel < 0 6076 \absseclevel = 0 6077 \else 6078 \ifnum \absseclevel > 3 6079 \absseclevel = 3 6080 \fi 6081 \fi 6082 % The heading type: 6083 \def\headtype{#1}% 6084 \if \headtype U% 6085 \ifnum \absseclevel < \unnlevel 6086 \chardef\unnlevel = \absseclevel 6087 \fi 6088 \else 6089 % Check for appendix sections: 6090 \ifnum \absseclevel = 0 6091 \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}% 6092 \else 6093 \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N% 6094 \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}% 6095 \fi\fi 6096 \fi 6097 % Check for numbered within unnumbered: 6098 \ifnum \absseclevel > \unnlevel 6099 \def\headtype{U}% 6100 \else 6101 \chardef\unnlevel = 3 6102 \fi 6103 \fi 6104 % Now print the heading: 6105 \if \headtype U% 6106 \ifcase\absseclevel 6107 \unnumberedzzz{#3}% 6108 \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}% 6109 \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}% 6110 \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 6111 \fi 6112 \else 6113 \if \headtype A% 6114 \ifcase\absseclevel 6115 \appendixzzz{#3}% 6116 \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}% 6117 \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}% 6118 \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}% 6119 \fi 6120 \else 6121 \ifcase\absseclevel 6122 \chapterzzz{#3}% 6123 \or \seczzz{#3}% 6124 \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}% 6125 \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 6126 \fi 6127 \fi 6128 \fi 6129 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 6130} 6131 6132% an interface: 6133\def\numhead{\genhead N} 6134\def\apphead{\genhead A} 6135\def\unnmhead{\genhead U} 6136 6137% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset 6138% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero. 6139% 6140% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers 6141% (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty. 6142\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 6143% 6144\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz 6145\def\chapterzzz#1{% 6146 % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such 6147 % as an @include file. 6148 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 6149 \global\advance\chapno by 1 6150 % 6151 % Used for \float. 6152 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}% 6153 \resetallfloatnos 6154 % 6155 % \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations. 6156 \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}% 6157 \message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}% 6158 % 6159 % Write the actual heading. 6160 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}% 6161 % 6162 % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter. 6163 \global\let\section = \numberedsec 6164 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 6165 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 6166} 6167 6168\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz 6169% 6170\def\appendixzzz#1{% 6171 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 6172 \global\advance\appendixno by 1 6173 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}% 6174 \resetallfloatnos 6175 % 6176 % \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations. 6177 \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}% 6178 \message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}% 6179 % 6180 \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}% 6181 % 6182 \global\let\section = \appendixsec 6183 \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec 6184 \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec 6185} 6186 6187% normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz: 6188\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} 6189\def\unnumberedzzz#1{% 6190 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 6191 \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1 6192 % 6193 % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures. 6194 \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 6195 \resetallfloatnos 6196 % 6197 % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the 6198 % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX 6199 % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX 6200 % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant 6201 % to be executed, not expanded). 6202 % 6203 % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear 6204 % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use 6205 % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, 6206 % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for 6207 % the toc entries.) 6208 \toks0 = {#1}% 6209 \message{(\the\toks0)}% 6210 % 6211 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}% 6212 % 6213 \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec 6214 \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec 6215 \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec 6216} 6217 6218% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. 6219\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{% 6220 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters 6221 \unnmhead0{#1}% 6222 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 6223} 6224 6225% @top is like @unnumbered. 6226\let\top\unnumbered 6227 6228% Sections. 6229% 6230\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz 6231\def\seczzz#1{% 6232 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 6233 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}% 6234} 6235 6236% normally calls appendixsectionzzz: 6237\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} 6238\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{% 6239 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 6240 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}% 6241} 6242\let\appendixsec\appendixsection 6243 6244% normally calls unnumberedseczzz: 6245\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} 6246\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{% 6247 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 6248 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}% 6249} 6250 6251% Subsections. 6252% 6253% normally calls numberedsubseczzz: 6254\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} 6255\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{% 6256 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 6257 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 6258} 6259 6260% normally calls appendixsubseczzz: 6261\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} 6262\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{% 6263 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 6264 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}% 6265 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 6266} 6267 6268% normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz: 6269\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} 6270\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{% 6271 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 6272 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}% 6273 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 6274} 6275 6276% Subsubsections. 6277% 6278% normally numberedsubsubseczzz: 6279\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} 6280\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 6281 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 6282 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}% 6283 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 6284} 6285 6286% normally appendixsubsubseczzz: 6287\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} 6288\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{% 6289 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 6290 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}% 6291 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 6292} 6293 6294% normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz: 6295\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} 6296\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 6297 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 6298 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}% 6299 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 6300} 6301 6302% These macros control what the section commands do, according 6303% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). 6304% Define them by default for a numbered chapter. 6305\let\section = \numberedsec 6306\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 6307\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 6308 6309% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading 6310 6311\def\majorheading{% 6312 {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% 6313 \parsearg\chapheadingzzz 6314} 6315 6316\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz} 6317\def\chapheadingzzz#1{% 6318 \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}% 6319 \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak 6320 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 6321} 6322 6323% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. 6324\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 6325 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 6326\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 6327 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 6328\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 6329 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 6330 6331% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only 6332% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), 6333% given all the information in convenient, parsed form. 6334 6335% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) 6336\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} 6337 6338% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) 6339\newskip\chapheadingskip 6340 6341% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it. 6342\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} 6343 6344% Start a new page 6345\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} 6346 6347% \chapoddpage - start on an odd page for a new chapter 6348% Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will 6349% get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't 6350% care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page. 6351\def\chapoddpage{% 6352 \chappager 6353 \ifodd\pageno \else 6354 \begingroup 6355 \headingsoff 6356 \null 6357 \chappager 6358 \endgroup 6359 \fi 6360} 6361 6362\parseargdef\setchapternewpage{\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} 6363 6364\def\CHAPPAGoff{% 6365\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 6366\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak 6367\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsinglechapoff}} 6368 6369\def\CHAPPAGon{% 6370\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 6371\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager 6372\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} 6373 6374\def\CHAPPAGodd{% 6375\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 6376\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage 6377\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} 6378 6379\CHAPPAGon 6380 6381% \chapmacro - Chapter opening. 6382% 6383% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, 6384% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number. 6385% Not used for @heading series. 6386% 6387% To test against our argument. 6388\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing} 6389\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix} 6390\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc} 6391% 6392\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{% 6393 \expandafter\ifx\thisenv\titlepage\else 6394 \checkenv{}% chapters, etc., should not start inside an environment. 6395 \fi 6396 % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 6397 \let\prevchapterdefs=\currentchapterdefs 6398 \let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs 6399 \gdef\currentsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 6400 \gdef\thissection{}}% 6401 % 6402 \def\temptype{#2}% 6403 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6404 \gdef\currentchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 6405 \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}% 6406 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6407 \gdef\currentchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 6408 \gdef\thischapter{}}% 6409 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6410 \toks0={#1}% 6411 \xdef\currentchapterdefs{% 6412 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 6413 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}% 6414 % \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible 6415 % commands in some of the translations. 6416 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{} 6417 \noexpand\thischapternum: 6418 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 6419 }% 6420 \else 6421 \toks0={#1}% 6422 \xdef\currentchapterdefs{% 6423 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 6424 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}% 6425 % \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible 6426 % commands in some of the translations. 6427 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{} 6428 \noexpand\thischapternum: 6429 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 6430 }% 6431 \fi\fi\fi 6432 % 6433 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 6434 % the preceding space. 6435 \safewhatsit\domark 6436 % 6437 % Insert the chapter heading break. 6438 \pchapsepmacro 6439 % 6440 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 6441 % between here and the heading. 6442 \let\prevchapterdefs=\currentchapterdefs 6443 \let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs 6444 \domark 6445 % 6446 {% 6447 \chapfonts \rm 6448 \let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading % give better error message 6449 % 6450 % Have to define \currentsection before calling \donoderef, because the 6451 % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called 6452 % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon. 6453 \gdef\currentsection{#1}% 6454 % 6455 % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix 6456 % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''. 6457 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6458 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 6459 \def\toctype{unnchap}% 6460 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6461 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry 6462 \def\toctype{omit}% 6463 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6464 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}% 6465 \def\toctype{app}% 6466 \else 6467 \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}% 6468 \def\toctype{numchap}% 6469 \fi\fi\fi 6470 % 6471 % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the 6472 % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc 6473 % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty. 6474 \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}% 6475 % 6476 % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make 6477 % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has 6478 % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the 6479 % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not 6480 % being visible, for instance under high magnification. 6481 \donoderef{#2}% 6482 % 6483 % Typeset the actual heading. 6484 \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue. 6485 \vbox{\raggedtitlesettings \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe 6486 \unhbox0 #1\par}% 6487 }% 6488 \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title 6489 \nobreak 6490} 6491 6492% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. 6493\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 6494\def\centerparameters{% 6495 \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip 6496 \leftskip = \rightskip 6497 \parfillskip = 0pt 6498} 6499 6500 6501% Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and 6502% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing. 6503% 6504\newskip\secheadingskip 6505\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}} 6506 6507% Subsection titles. 6508\newskip\subsecheadingskip 6509\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}} 6510 6511% Subsubsection titles. 6512\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip} 6513\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak} 6514 6515 6516% Print any size, any type, section title. 6517% 6518% #1 is the text of the title, 6519% #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), 6520% #3 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), 6521% #4 is the section number. 6522% 6523\def\seckeyword{sec} 6524% 6525\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{% 6526 {% 6527 \def\sectionlevel{#2}% 6528 \def\temptype{#3}% 6529 % 6530 % It is ok for the @heading series commands to appear inside an 6531 % environment (it's been historically allowed, though the logic is 6532 % dubious), but not the others. 6533 \ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword\else 6534 \checkenv{}% non-@*heading should not be in an environment. 6535 \fi 6536 \let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading 6537 % 6538 % Switch to the right set of fonts. 6539 \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm 6540 % 6541 % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 6542 \let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs 6543 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6544 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 6545 \gdef\currentsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 6546 \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}% 6547 \fi 6548 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6549 % Don't redefine \thissection. 6550 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6551 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 6552 \toks0={#1}% 6553 \xdef\currentsectiondefs{% 6554 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 6555 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 6556 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible 6557 % commands in some of the translations. 6558 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} 6559 \noexpand\thissectionnum: 6560 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 6561 }% 6562 \fi 6563 \else 6564 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 6565 \toks0={#1}% 6566 \xdef\currentsectiondefs{% 6567 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 6568 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 6569 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible 6570 % commands in some of the translations. 6571 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} 6572 \noexpand\thissectionnum: 6573 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 6574 }% 6575 \fi 6576 \fi\fi\fi 6577 % 6578 % Go into vertical mode. Usually we'll already be there, but we 6579 % don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph 6580 % if the document didn't happen to have a blank line. 6581 \par 6582 % 6583 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 6584 % the preceding space. 6585 \safewhatsit\domark 6586 % 6587 % Insert space above the heading. 6588 \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname 6589 % 6590 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 6591 % between here and the heading. 6592 \global\let\prevsectiondefs=\currentsectiondefs 6593 \domark 6594 % 6595 % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number. 6596 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6597 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 6598 \def\toctype{unn}% 6599 \gdef\currentsection{#1}% 6600 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6601 % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc, 6602 % and don't redefine \currentsection. 6603 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 6604 \def\toctype{omit}% 6605 \let\sectionlevel=\empty 6606 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6607 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 6608 \def\toctype{app}% 6609 \gdef\currentsection{#1}% 6610 \else 6611 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 6612 \def\toctype{num}% 6613 \gdef\currentsection{#1}% 6614 \fi\fi\fi 6615 % 6616 % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro. 6617 \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}% 6618 % 6619 % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex). 6620 % Again, see comments in \chapmacro. 6621 \donoderef{#3}% 6622 % 6623 % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed. 6624 % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be 6625 % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the 6626 % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that 6627 % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the 6628 % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000. 6629 \nobreak 6630 % 6631 % Output the actual section heading. 6632 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright 6633 \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number 6634 \unhbox0 #1}% 6635 }% 6636 % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it. 6637 % Don't allow stretch, though. 6638 \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname 6639 % 6640 % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it 6641 % was followed by glue. 6642 \nobreak 6643 % 6644 % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that 6645 % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a 6646 % discardable item.) However, when a paragraph is not started next 6647 % (\startdefun, \cartouche, \center, etc.), this needs to be wiped out 6648 % or the negative glue will cause weirdly wrong output, typically 6649 % obscuring the section heading with something else. 6650 \vskip-\parskip 6651 % 6652 % This is so the last item on the main vertical list is a known 6653 % \penalty > 10000, so \startdefun, etc., can recognize the situation 6654 % and do the needful. 6655 \penalty 10001 6656} 6657 6658 6659\message{toc,} 6660% Table of contents. 6661\newwrite\tocfile 6662 6663% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. 6664% Called from @chapter, etc. 6665% 6666% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno} 6667% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional 6668% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually 6669% read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the 6670% destination to jump to. 6671% 6672% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or 6673% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document. 6674% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the 6675% table of contents chapter openings themselves. 6676% 6677\newif\iftocfileopened 6678\def\omitkeyword{omit}% 6679% 6680\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{% 6681 \edef\writetoctype{#1}% 6682 \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else 6683 \iftocfileopened\else 6684 \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc 6685 \global\tocfileopenedtrue 6686 \fi 6687 % 6688 \iflinks 6689 {\atdummies 6690 \edef\temp{% 6691 \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}% 6692 \temp 6693 }% 6694 \fi 6695 \fi 6696 % 6697 % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're 6698 % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't 6699 % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered 6700 % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first 6701 % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named 6702 % `1', and two named `2'. 6703 \ifpdforxetex 6704 \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue 6705 \fi 6706} 6707 6708 6709% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman 6710% fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant 6711% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file. 6712% 6713\def\activecatcodes{% 6714 \catcode`\"=\active 6715 \catcode`\$=\active 6716 \catcode`\<=\active 6717 \catcode`\>=\active 6718 \catcode`\\=\active 6719 \catcode`\^=\active 6720 \catcode`\_=\active 6721 \catcode`\|=\active 6722 \catcode`\~=\active 6723} 6724 6725 6726% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input. 6727\def\readtocfile{% 6728 \setupdatafile 6729 \activecatcodes 6730 \input \tocreadfilename 6731} 6732 6733\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in 6734\newcount\savepageno 6735\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 6736 6737% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile. 6738% 6739\def\startcontents#1{% 6740 % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should 6741 % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. 6742 \contentsalignmacro 6743 \immediate\closeout\tocfile 6744 % 6745 % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. 6746 % It is abundantly clear what they are. 6747 \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% 6748 % 6749 \savepageno = \pageno 6750 \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. 6751 \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. 6752 \entryrightmargin=\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. 6753 % 6754 % Roman numerals for page numbers. 6755 \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi 6756 \def\thistitle{}% no title in double-sided headings 6757 % Record where the Roman numerals started. 6758 \ifnum\romancount=0 \global\romancount=\pagecount \fi 6759} 6760 6761% redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on 6762% \jobname.toc even if this is redefined. 6763% 6764\def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc} 6765 6766% Normal (long) toc. 6767% 6768\def\contents{% 6769 \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% 6770 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 6771 \ifeof 1 \else 6772 \readtocfile 6773 \fi 6774 \vfill \eject 6775 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 6776 \ifeof 1 \else 6777 \pdfmakeoutlines 6778 \fi 6779 \closein 1 6780 \endgroup 6781 \contentsendroman 6782} 6783 6784% And just the chapters. 6785\def\summarycontents{% 6786 \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% 6787 % 6788 \let\partentry = \shortpartentry 6789 \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry 6790 \let\appentry = \shortchapentry 6791 \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry 6792 % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. 6793 \secfonts 6794 \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf 6795 \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt 6796 \rm 6797 \hyphenpenalty = 10000 6798 \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. 6799 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{} 6800 \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry 6801 \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry 6802 \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6803 \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6804 \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6805 \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6806 \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6807 \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6808 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 6809 \ifeof 1 \else 6810 \readtocfile 6811 \fi 6812 \closein 1 6813 \vfill \eject 6814 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 6815 \endgroup 6816 \contentsendroman 6817} 6818\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents 6819 6820% Get ready to use Arabic numerals again 6821\def\contentsendroman{% 6822 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 6823 \global\pageno = \savepageno 6824 % 6825 % If \romancount > \arabiccount, the contents are at the end of the 6826 % document. Otherwise, advance where the Arabic numerals start for 6827 % the page numbers. 6828 \ifnum\romancount>\arabiccount\else\global\arabiccount=\pagecount\fi 6829} 6830 6831% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. 6832% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. 6833% 6834\def\shortchaplabel#1{% 6835 % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the 6836 % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. 6837 % But use \hss just in case. 6838 % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after 6839 % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) 6840 % 6841 % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange 6842 % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and 6843 % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10 6844 % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters 6845 % there are before deciding ... 6846 \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}% 6847} 6848 6849% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. 6850% The first argument is the chapter or section name. 6851% The last argument is the page number. 6852% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... 6853 6854% Parts, in the main contents. Replace the part number, which doesn't 6855% exist, with an empty box. Let's hope all the numbers have the same width. 6856% Also ignore the page number, which is conventionally not printed. 6857\def\numeralbox{\setbox0=\hbox{8}\hbox to \wd0{\hfil}} 6858\def\partentry#1#2#3#4{% 6859 % Add stretch and a bonus for breaking the page before the part heading. 6860 % This reduces the chance of the page being broken immediately after the 6861 % part heading, before a following chapter heading. 6862 \vskip 0pt plus 5\baselineskip 6863 \penalty-300 6864 \vskip 0pt plus -5\baselineskip 6865 \dochapentry{\numeralbox\labelspace#1}{}% 6866} 6867% 6868% Parts, in the short toc. 6869\def\shortpartentry#1#2#3#4{% 6870 \penalty-300 6871 \vskip.5\baselineskip plus.15\baselineskip minus.1\baselineskip 6872 \shortchapentry{{\bf #1}}{\numeralbox}{}{}% 6873} 6874 6875% Chapters, in the main contents. 6876\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6877 6878% Chapters, in the short toc. 6879% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings. 6880\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{% 6881 \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}% 6882} 6883 6884% Appendices, in the main contents. 6885% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box. 6886% 6887\def\appendixbox#1{% 6888 % We use M since it's probably the widest letter. 6889 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}% 6890 \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}} 6891% 6892\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\hskip.7em#1}{#4}} 6893 6894% Unnumbered chapters. 6895\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}} 6896\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}} 6897 6898% Sections. 6899\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6900\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry 6901\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}} 6902 6903% Subsections. 6904\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6905\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry 6906\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 6907 6908% And subsubsections. 6909\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6910\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry 6911\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 6912 6913% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. 6914% Same as \defaultparindent. 6915\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt 6916 6917% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the 6918% page number. 6919% 6920% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters 6921% if at all possible; hence the \penalty. 6922\def\dochapentry#1#2{% 6923 \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip 6924 \begingroup 6925 % Move the page numbers slightly to the right 6926 \advance\entryrightmargin by -0.05em 6927 \chapentryfonts 6928 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 6929 \endgroup 6930 \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip 6931} 6932 6933\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup 6934 \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent 6935 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 6936\endgroup} 6937 6938\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 6939 \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent 6940 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 6941\endgroup} 6942 6943\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 6944 \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent 6945 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 6946\endgroup} 6947 6948% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries. 6949\let\tocentry = \entry 6950 6951% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. 6952\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} 6953 6954\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} 6955\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} 6956 6957\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} 6958\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} 6959\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 6960\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 6961 6962 6963\message{environments,} 6964% @foo ... @end foo. 6965 6966% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw TeX temporarily. 6967% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. 6968% But \@ or @@ will get a plain @ character. 6969 6970\envdef\tex{% 6971 \setregularquotes 6972 \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 6973 \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 6974 \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie 6975 \catcode `\%=14 6976 \catcode `\+=\other 6977 \catcode `\"=\other 6978 \catcode `\|=\other 6979 \catcode `\<=\other 6980 \catcode `\>=\other 6981 \catcode `\`=\other 6982 \catcode `\'=\other 6983 % 6984 % ' is active in math mode (mathcode"8000). So reset it, and all our 6985 % other math active characters (just in case), to plain's definitions. 6986 \mathactive 6987 % 6988 % Inverse of the list at the beginning of the file. 6989 \let\b=\ptexb 6990 \let\bullet=\ptexbullet 6991 \let\c=\ptexc 6992 \let\,=\ptexcomma 6993 \let\.=\ptexdot 6994 \let\dots=\ptexdots 6995 \let\equiv=\ptexequiv 6996 \let\!=\ptexexclam 6997 \let\i=\ptexi 6998 \let\indent=\ptexindent 6999 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent 7000 \let\{=\ptexlbrace 7001 \let\+=\tabalign 7002 \let\}=\ptexrbrace 7003 \let\/=\ptexslash 7004 \let\sp=\ptexsp 7005 \let\*=\ptexstar 7006 %\let\sup=\ptexsup % do not redefine, we want @sup to work in math mode 7007 \let\t=\ptext 7008 \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % we've made it outer 7009 \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing 7010 % 7011 \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% 7012 \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% 7013 \def\@{@}% 7014} 7015% There is no need to define \Etex. 7016 7017% Define @lisp ... @end lisp. 7018% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things, 7019% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous). 7020 7021% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. 7022\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in 7023 7024% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other 7025% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't 7026% have any width. 7027\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} 7028 7029% This space is always present above and below environments. 7030\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt 7031 7032% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here 7033% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip 7034% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the 7035% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip. 7036% 7037\def\aboveenvbreak{{% 7038 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and 7039 % \sectionheading, q.v. 7040 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else 7041 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip 7042 \endgraf 7043 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount 7044 \removelastskip 7045 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 7046 % Penalize breaking before the environment, because preceding text 7047 % often leads into it. 7048 \penalty100 7049 \fi 7050 \vskip\envskipamount 7051 \fi 7052 \fi 7053}} 7054 7055\def\afterenvbreak{{% 7056 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and 7057 % \sectionheading, q.v. 7058 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else 7059 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip 7060 \endgraf 7061 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount 7062 \removelastskip 7063 % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak 7064 % or better ... 7065 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi 7066 \vskip\envskipamount 7067 \fi 7068 \fi 7069}} 7070 7071% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will 7072% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again. 7073\let\nonarrowing=\relax 7074 7075% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around 7076% environment contents. 7077 7078% 7079\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth 7080\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} 7081\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} 7082\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} 7083\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 7084 \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr 7085 \hskip\rskip}} 7086\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 7087 \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr 7088 \hskip\rskip}} 7089% 7090\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip 7091 7092% only require the font if @cartouche is actually used 7093\def\cartouchefontdefs{% 7094 \font\circle=lcircle10\relax 7095 \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle 7096} 7097\newdimen\circthick 7098\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner 7099\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip 7100 7101 7102\envdef\cartouche{% 7103 \cartouchefontdefs 7104 \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph. 7105 \startsavinginserts 7106 \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip 7107 \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*. 7108 \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip 7109 \advance\cartinner by-\rskip 7110 \cartouter=\hsize 7111 \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either 7112 % side, and for 6pt waste from 7113 % each corner char, and rule thickness 7114 \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip 7115 % 7116 % If this cartouche directly follows a sectioning command, we need the 7117 % \parskip glue (backspaced over by default) or the cartouche can 7118 % collide with the section heading. 7119 \ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \penalty\lastpenalty \fi 7120 % 7121 \setbox\groupbox=\vbox\bgroup 7122 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt 7123 \carttop 7124 \hbox\bgroup 7125 \hskip\lskip 7126 \vrule\kern3pt 7127 \vbox\bgroup 7128 \kern3pt 7129 \hsize=\cartinner 7130 \baselineskip=\normbskip 7131 \lineskip=\normlskip 7132 \parskip=\normpskip 7133 \vskip -\parskip 7134 \comment % For explanation, see the end of def\group. 7135} 7136\def\Ecartouche{% 7137 \ifhmode\par\fi 7138 \kern3pt 7139 \egroup 7140 \kern3pt\vrule 7141 \hskip\rskip 7142 \egroup 7143 \cartbot 7144 \egroup 7145 \addgroupbox 7146 \checkinserts 7147} 7148 7149 7150% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, 7151% inside a group. 7152\newdimen\nonfillparindent 7153\def\nonfillstart{% 7154 \aboveenvbreak 7155 \ifdim\hfuzz < 12pt \hfuzz = 12pt \fi % Don't be fussy 7156 \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. 7157 \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines 7158 \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output 7159 \parskip = 0pt 7160 % Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate 7161 % the normal \indent. 7162 \nonfillparindent=\parindent 7163 \parindent = 0pt 7164 \let\indent\nonfillindent 7165 % 7166 \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes 7167 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 7168 \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing 7169 \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing 7170 \else 7171 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 7172 \fi 7173 \let\exdent=\nofillexdent 7174} 7175 7176\begingroup 7177\obeyspaces 7178% We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake 7179% @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally 7180% active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after 7181% @indent. 7182\gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}% 7183\gdef\nonfillindentcheck{% 7184\ifx\temp % 7185\expandafter\nonfillindentgobble% 7186\else% 7187\leavevmode\nonfillindentbox% 7188\fi% 7189}% 7190\endgroup 7191\def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent} 7192\def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}} 7193 7194% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small. 7195% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall. 7196% This affects the following displayed environments: 7197% @example, @display, @format, @lisp, @verbatim 7198% 7199\def\smallword{small} 7200\def\nosmallword{nosmall} 7201\let\SETdispenvsize\relax 7202\def\setnormaldispenv{% 7203 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword 7204 % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank 7205 % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but 7206 % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient 7207 % to change the fonts afterward. 7208 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 7209 \smallexamplefonts \rm 7210 \fi 7211} 7212\def\setsmalldispenv{% 7213 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword 7214 \else 7215 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 7216 \smallexamplefonts \rm 7217 \fi 7218} 7219 7220% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo. 7221% Let's do it in one command. #1 is the env name, #2 the definition. 7222\def\makedispenvdef#1#2{% 7223 \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}% 7224 \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}% 7225 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 7226 \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 7227} 7228 7229% Define two environment synonyms (#1 and #2) for an environment. 7230\def\maketwodispenvdef#1#2#3{% 7231 \makedispenvdef{#1}{#3}% 7232 \makedispenvdef{#2}{#3}% 7233} 7234% 7235% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; 7236% @example: same as @lisp. 7237% 7238% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts. 7239% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. 7240% 7241\maketwodispenvdef{lisp}{example}{% 7242 \nonfillstart 7243 \tt\setcodequotes 7244 \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. 7245 \parsearg\gobble 7246} 7247% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font. 7248% 7249\makedispenvdef{display}{% 7250 \nonfillstart 7251 \gobble 7252} 7253 7254% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins. 7255% 7256\makedispenvdef{format}{% 7257 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7258 \nonfillstart 7259 \gobble 7260} 7261 7262% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize. 7263\envdef\flushleft{% 7264 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7265 \nonfillstart 7266 \gobble 7267} 7268\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak 7269 7270% @flushright. 7271% 7272\envdef\flushright{% 7273 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7274 \nonfillstart 7275 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill\relax 7276 \gobble 7277} 7278\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak 7279 7280 7281% @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right 7282% justification. From plain.tex. 7283\envdef\raggedright{% 7284 \rightskip0pt plus2.4em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax 7285} 7286\let\Eraggedright\par 7287 7288\envdef\raggedleft{% 7289 \parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em 7290 \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt 7291 \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off 7292 % badness reporting. 7293} 7294\let\Eraggedleft\par 7295 7296\envdef\raggedcenter{% 7297 \parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em 7298 \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt 7299 \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off 7300 % badness reporting. 7301} 7302\let\Eraggedcenter\par 7303 7304 7305% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) 7306% and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since 7307% we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and 7308% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0. 7309% 7310\makedispenvdef{quotation}{\quotationstart} 7311% 7312\def\quotationstart{% 7313 \indentedblockstart % same as \indentedblock, but increase right margin too. 7314 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 7315 \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing 7316 \fi 7317 \parsearg\quotationlabel 7318} 7319 7320% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're 7321% doing normal filling. 7322% 7323\def\Equotation{% 7324 \par 7325 \ifx\quotationauthor\thisisundefined\else 7326 % indent a bit. 7327 \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}% 7328 \fi 7329 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% 7330} 7331\def\Esmallquotation{\Equotation} 7332 7333% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after. 7334\def\quotationlabel#1{% 7335 \def\temp{#1}% 7336 \ifx\temp\empty \else 7337 {\bf #1: }% 7338 \fi 7339} 7340 7341% @indentedblock is like @quotation, but indents only on the left and 7342% has no optional argument. 7343% 7344\makedispenvdef{indentedblock}{\indentedblockstart} 7345% 7346\def\indentedblockstart{% 7347 {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip 7348 \parindent=0pt 7349 % 7350 % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. 7351 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 7352 \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing 7353 \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing 7354 \else 7355 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 7356 \fi 7357} 7358 7359% Keep a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're doing normal filling. 7360% 7361\def\Eindentedblock{% 7362 \par 7363 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% 7364} 7365\def\Esmallindentedblock{\Eindentedblock} 7366 7367 7368% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>} 7369% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter, 7370% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg: 7371% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. [email protected] 7372% 7373% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook. 7374% 7375% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets 7376% active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a 7377% verbatim line. 7378\def\dospecials{% 7379 \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% 7380 \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~% 7381 \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"% 7382 % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and 7383 % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and 7384 % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled. 7385 %\do\`\do\'% 7386} 7387% 7388% [Knuth] p. 380 7389\def\uncatcodespecials{% 7390 \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials} 7391% 7392% Setup for the @verb command. 7393% 7394% Eight spaces for a tab 7395\begingroup 7396 \catcode`\^^I=\active 7397 \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }} 7398\endgroup 7399% 7400\def\setupverb{% 7401 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 7402 \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}% 7403 \setcodequotes 7404 \tabeightspaces 7405 % Respect line breaks, 7406 % print special symbols as themselves, and 7407 % make each space count 7408 % must do in this order: 7409 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 7410} 7411 7412% Setup for the @verbatim environment 7413% 7414% Real tab expansion. 7415\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount 7416% 7417% We typeset each line of the verbatim in an \hbox, so we can handle 7418% tabs. 7419\newbox\verbbox 7420\def\starttabbox{\setbox\verbbox=\hbox\bgroup} 7421% 7422\begingroup 7423 \catcode`\^^I=\active 7424 \gdef\tabexpand{% 7425 \catcode`\^^I=\active 7426 \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup 7427 \dimen\verbbox=\wd\verbbox % the width so far, or since the previous tab 7428 \divide\dimen\verbbox by\tabw 7429 \multiply\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw 7430 \advance\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw 7431 \wd\verbbox=\dimen\verbbox 7432 \leavevmode\box\verbbox \starttabbox 7433 }% 7434 } 7435\endgroup 7436 7437% start the verbatim environment. 7438\def\setupverbatim{% 7439 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7440 \nonfillstart 7441 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 7442 \def\par{\egroup\leavevmode\box\verbbox\endgraf\starttabbox}% 7443 \tabexpand 7444 \setcodequotes 7445 % Respect line breaks, 7446 % print special symbols as themselves, and 7447 % make each space count. 7448 % Must do in this order: 7449 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 7450} 7451 7452% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique 7453% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a 7454% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace: 7455% 7456% \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1} 7457% 7458% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {} 7459\begingroup 7460 \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other 7461 \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next] 7462\endgroup 7463% 7464\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb} 7465% 7466% 7467% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that 7468% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie: 7469% 7470% \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1} 7471% 7472% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, 7473% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}': 7474% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'. 7475% 7476% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx] 7477% 7478\begingroup 7479 \catcode`\ =\active 7480 \obeylines % 7481 % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end 7482 % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank 7483 % line in the output. 7484 \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{% 7485 \starttabbox#2\egroup\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}% 7486 % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but 7487 % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble. 7488 % The \egroup ends the \verbbox started at the end of the last line in 7489 % the block. 7490\endgroup 7491% 7492\envdef\verbatim{% 7493 \setnormaldispenv\setupverbatim\doverbatim 7494} 7495\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak 7496 7497 7498% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment. 7499% 7500\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude} 7501% 7502\def\doverbatiminclude#1{% 7503 {% 7504 \makevalueexpandable 7505 \setupverbatim 7506 {% 7507 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. 7508 \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @verbatiminclude of #1^^J}% 7509 \edef\tmp{\noexpand\input #1 } 7510 \expandafter 7511 }\expandafter\starttabbox\tmp\egroup 7512 \afterenvbreak 7513 }% 7514} 7515 7516% @copying ... @end copying. 7517% Save the text away for @insertcopying later. 7518% 7519% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box. 7520% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the 7521% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done 7522% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source 7523% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as 7524% possible is desirable. 7525% 7526\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying} 7527\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}} 7528% 7529\def\insertcopying{% 7530 \begingroup 7531 \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page 7532 \scanexp\copyingtext 7533 \endgroup 7534} 7535 7536 7537\message{defuns,} 7538% @defun etc. 7539 7540\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in 7541\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt 7542\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt 7543\newcount\defunpenalty 7544 7545% Start the processing of @deffn: 7546\def\startdefun{% 7547 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 7548 \medbreak 7549 \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the 7550 % following @def command, see below. 7551 \else 7552 % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak, 7553 % which is there to keep the function description together with its 7554 % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a 7555 % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted 7556 % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning 7557 % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow 7558 % a break between a section heading and a defun. 7559 % 7560 % As a further refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling 7561 % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the 7562 % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following 7563 % @def command. 7564 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 7565 % 7566 % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break. 7567 % But do insert the glue. 7568 \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint 7569 \fi 7570 % 7571 \parindent=0in 7572 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent 7573 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 7574} 7575 7576\def\dodefunx#1{% 7577 % First, check whether we are in the right environment: 7578 \checkenv#1% 7579 % 7580 % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row. 7581 % It's not a great place, though. 7582 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 7583 % 7584 % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun: 7585 \expandafter\gobbledefun#1% 7586} 7587\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{} 7588 7589% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text} 7590% 7591\def\printdefunline#1#2{% 7592 \begingroup 7593 \plainfrenchspacing 7594 % call \deffnheader: 7595 #1#2 \endheader 7596 % common ending: 7597 \interlinepenalty = 10000 7598 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil\relax 7599 \endgraf 7600 \nobreak\vskip -\parskip 7601 \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx 7602 % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses, 7603 % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize. 7604 \checkparencounts 7605 \endgroup 7606} 7607 7608\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak} 7609 7610% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn; 7611% the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader. 7612% 7613\def\makedefun#1{% 7614 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun 7615 \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun 7616 \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}% 7617 \temp 7618} 7619 7620% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader { (defn. of \deffnheader) } 7621% 7622% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters. 7623% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly. 7624% 7625\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{% 7626 \envdef#1{% 7627 \startdefun 7628 \doingtypefnfalse % distinguish typed functions from all else 7629 \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}% 7630 }% 7631 \def#2{\dodefunx#1}% 7632 \def#3% 7633} 7634 7635\newif\ifdoingtypefn % doing typed function? 7636\newif\ifrettypeownline % typeset return type on its own line? 7637 7638% @deftypefnnewline on|off says whether the return type of typed functions 7639% are printed on their own line. This affects @deftypefn, @deftypefun, 7640% @deftypeop, and @deftypemethod. 7641% 7642\parseargdef\deftypefnnewline{% 7643 \def\temp{#1}% 7644 \ifx\temp\onword 7645 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname 7646 = \empty 7647 \else\ifx\temp\offword 7648 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname 7649 = \relax 7650 \else 7651 \errhelp = \EMsimple 7652 \errmessage{Unknown @txideftypefnnl value `\temp', 7653 must be on|off}% 7654 \fi\fi 7655} 7656 7657% \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} 7658% 7659% If SUBTOPIC is present, precede it with a space, and call \doind. 7660% (At some time during the 20th century, this made a two-level entry in an 7661% index such as the operation index. Nobody seemed to notice the change in 7662% behaviour though.) 7663\def\dosubind#1#2#3{% 7664 \def\thirdarg{#3}% 7665 \ifx\thirdarg\empty 7666 \doind{#1}{#2}% 7667 \else 7668 \doind{#1}{#2\space#3}% 7669 \fi 7670} 7671 7672% Untyped functions: 7673 7674% @deffn category name args 7675\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}} 7676 7677% @deffn category class name args 7678\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 7679 7680% \defopon {category on}class name args 7681\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 7682 7683% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args 7684% 7685\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{% 7686 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}% 7687 \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}% 7688} 7689 7690% Typed functions: 7691 7692% @deftypefn category type name args 7693\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}} 7694 7695% @deftypeop category class type name args 7696\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 7697 7698% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args 7699\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 7700 7701% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args 7702% 7703\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 7704 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 7705 \doingtypefntrue 7706 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 7707} 7708 7709% Typed variables: 7710 7711% @deftypevr category type var args 7712\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}} 7713 7714% @deftypecv category class type var args 7715\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 7716 7717% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args 7718\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 7719 7720% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args 7721% 7722\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 7723 \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 7724 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 7725} 7726 7727% Untyped variables: 7728 7729% @defvr category var args 7730\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} } 7731 7732% @defcv category class var args 7733\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 7734 7735% \defcvof {category of}class var args 7736\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} } 7737 7738% Types: 7739 7740% @deftp category name args 7741\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{% 7742 \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}% 7743 \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}% 7744} 7745 7746% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts: 7747\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 7748\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} } 7749\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} } 7750\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 7751\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 7752\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} } 7753\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 7754\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon} 7755\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon} 7756\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 7757\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 7758 7759% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args). 7760% #1 is the category, such as "Function". 7761% #2 is the return type, if any. 7762% #3 is the function name. 7763% 7764% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any. 7765% 7766\def\defname#1#2#3{% 7767 \par 7768 % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def... 7769 \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent 7770 % 7771 % Determine if we are typesetting the return type of a typed function 7772 % on a line by itself. 7773 \rettypeownlinefalse 7774 \ifdoingtypefn % doing a typed function specifically? 7775 % then check user option for putting return type on its own line: 7776 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname\relax \else 7777 \rettypeownlinetrue 7778 \fi 7779 \fi 7780 % 7781 % How we'll format the category name. Putting it in brackets helps 7782 % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line 7783 % just below it. 7784 \def\temp{#1}% 7785 \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi} 7786 % 7787 % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. We'll always have at 7788 % least two. 7789 \tempnum = 2 7790 % 7791 % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero, 7792 % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it: 7793 \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip 7794 % 7795 % If doing a return type on its own line, we'll have another line. 7796 \ifrettypeownline 7797 \advance\tempnum by 1 7798 \def\maybeshapeline{0in \hsize}% 7799 \else 7800 \def\maybeshapeline{}% 7801 \fi 7802 % 7803 % The continuations: 7804 \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent 7805 % 7806 % The final paragraph shape: 7807 \parshape \tempnum 0in \dimen0 \maybeshapeline \defargsindent \dimen2 7808 % 7809 % Put the category name at the right margin. 7810 \noindent 7811 \hbox to 0pt{% 7812 \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize 7813 % \hsize has to be shortened this way: 7814 \kern\leftskip 7815 % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space. 7816 }% 7817 % 7818 % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint: 7819 \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 7820 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 7821 {% 7822 % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because: 7823 % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle. 7824 % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's 7825 % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in 7826 % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm. 7827 % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures. 7828 % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no 7829 % one has made identifiers using them :). 7830 \df \tt 7831 \def\temp{#2}% text of the return type 7832 \ifx\temp\empty\else 7833 \tclose{\temp}% typeset the return type 7834 \ifrettypeownline 7835 % put return type on its own line; prohibit line break following: 7836 \hfil\vadjust{\nobreak}\break 7837 \else 7838 \space % type on same line, so just followed by a space 7839 \fi 7840 \fi % no return type 7841 #3% output function name 7842 }% 7843 {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \rmfont 7844 % 7845 \boldbrax 7846 % arguments will be output next, if any. 7847} 7848 7849% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using 7850% tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in 7851% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very 7852% distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars. 7853% 7854\def\defunargs#1{% 7855 % use sl by default (not ttsl), 7856 % tt for the names. 7857 \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0 7858 % 7859 % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we 7860 % want a way to get ttsl. We used to recommend @var for that, so 7861 % leave the code in, but it's strange for @var to lead to typewriter. 7862 % Nowadays we recommend @code, since the difference between a ttsl hyphen 7863 % and a tt hyphen is pretty tiny. @code also disables ?` !`. 7864 \def\var##1{{\setregularquotes\ttslanted{##1}}}% 7865 #1% 7866 \sl\hyphenchar\font=45 7867} 7868 7869% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line. 7870% 7871\def\activeparens{% 7872 \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active 7873 \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active 7874 \catcode`\&=\active 7875} 7876 7877% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. 7878\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) 7879 7880% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, 7881% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, 7882% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. 7883{ 7884 \activeparens 7885 \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen 7886 \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack 7887 \global\let& = \& 7888 7889 \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} 7890 \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm} 7891} 7892\let\ampchar\& 7893 7894\newcount\parencount 7895 7896% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards 7897\newif\ifampseen 7898\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }} 7899 7900\def\parenfont{% 7901 \ifampseen 7902 % At the first level, print parens in roman, 7903 % otherwise use the default font. 7904 \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi 7905 \else 7906 % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than 7907 % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] . 7908 \sf 7909 \fi 7910} 7911\def\infirstlevel#1{% 7912 \ifampseen 7913 \ifnum\parencount=1 7914 #1% 7915 \fi 7916 \fi 7917} 7918\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf} 7919 7920\def\opnr{% 7921 \global\advance\parencount by 1 7922 {\parenfont(}% 7923 \infirstlevel \bfafterword 7924} 7925\def\clnr{% 7926 {\parenfont)}% 7927 \infirstlevel \sl 7928 \global\advance\parencount by -1 7929} 7930 7931\newcount\brackcount 7932\def\lbrb{% 7933 \global\advance\brackcount by 1 7934 {\bf[}% 7935} 7936\def\rbrb{% 7937 {\bf]}% 7938 \global\advance\brackcount by -1 7939} 7940 7941\def\checkparencounts{% 7942 \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi 7943 \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi 7944} 7945% these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually 7946% has such constructs (when documenting function pointers). 7947\def\badparencount{% 7948 \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}% 7949 \global\parencount=0 7950} 7951\def\badbrackcount{% 7952 \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}% 7953 \global\brackcount=0 7954} 7955 7956 7957\message{macros,} 7958% @macro. 7959 7960% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, 7961% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. 7962\ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined 7963 \newwrite\macscribble 7964 \def\scantokens#1{% 7965 \toks0={#1}% 7966 \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp 7967 \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% 7968 \immediate\closeout\macscribble 7969 \input \jobname.tmp 7970 } 7971\fi 7972 7973\let\E=\expandafter 7974 7975% Used at the time of macro expansion. 7976% Argument is macro body with arguments substituted 7977\def\scanmacro#1{% 7978 \newlinechar`\^^M 7979 % expand the expansion of \eatleadingcr twice to maybe remove a leading 7980 % newline (and \else and \fi tokens), then call \eatspaces on the result. 7981 \def\xeatspaces##1{% 7982 \E\E\E\E\E\E\E\eatspaces\E\E\E\E\E\E\E{\eatleadingcr##1% 7983 }}% 7984 \def\xempty##1{}% 7985 % 7986 % Process the macro body under the current catcode regime. 7987 \scantokens{#1@comment}% 7988 % 7989 % The \comment is to remove the \newlinechar added by \scantokens, and 7990 % can be noticed by \parsearg. Note \c isn't used because this means cedilla 7991 % in math mode. 7992} 7993 7994% Used for copying and captions 7995\def\scanexp#1{% 7996 \expandafter\scanmacro\expandafter{#1}% 7997} 7998 7999\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters 8000\newtoks\macname % Macro name 8001\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive? 8002 8003% List of all defined macros in the form 8004% \commondummyword\macro1\commondummyword\macro2... 8005% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split 8006% if there is a need. 8007\def\macrolist{} 8008 8009% Add the macro to \macrolist 8010\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname} 8011\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{% 8012 \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\commondummyword#1}% 8013 \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}% 8014} 8015 8016% Utility routines. 8017% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is, 8018% \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname 8019% (except of course we have to play expansion games). 8020% 8021\def\cslet#1#2{% 8022 \expandafter\let 8023 \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname 8024 \csname#2\endcsname 8025} 8026 8027% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. 8028% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). 8029{\catcode`\@=11 8030\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} 8031\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} 8032\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} 8033\def\unbrace#1{#1} 8034\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} 8035} 8036 8037{\catcode`\^^M=\other% 8038\gdef\eatleadingcr#1{\if\noexpand#1\noexpand^^M\else\E#1\fi}}% 8039% Warning: this won't work for a delimited argument 8040% or for an empty argument 8041 8042% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. 8043{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3% 8044\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% 8045\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% 8046\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% 8047} 8048 8049% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where 8050% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active 8051% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \ 8052% to recognize macro arguments; this is the job of \mbodybackslash. 8053% 8054% Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate 8055% them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to 8056% confine the change to the current group. 8057% 8058% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is 8059% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro 8060% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. 8061% 8062\def\scanctxt{% used as subroutine 8063 \catcode`\"=\other 8064 \catcode`\+=\other 8065 \catcode`\<=\other 8066 \catcode`\>=\other 8067 \catcode`\^=\other 8068 \catcode`\_=\other 8069 \catcode`\|=\other 8070 \catcode`\~=\other 8071 \passthroughcharstrue 8072} 8073 8074\def\scanargctxt{% used for copying and captions, not macros. 8075 \scanctxt 8076 \catcode`\@=\other 8077 \catcode`\\=\other 8078 \catcode`\^^M=\other 8079} 8080 8081\def\macrobodyctxt{% used for @macro definitions 8082 \scanctxt 8083 \catcode`\ =\other 8084 \catcode`\@=\other 8085 \catcode`\{=\other 8086 \catcode`\}=\other 8087 \catcode`\^^M=\other 8088 \usembodybackslash 8089} 8090 8091% Used when scanning braced macro arguments. Note, however, that catcode 8092% changes here are ineffectual if the macro invocation was nested inside 8093% an argument to another Texinfo command. 8094\def\macroargctxt{% 8095 \scanctxt 8096 \catcode`\ =\active 8097 \catcode`\@=\other 8098 \catcode`\^^M=\other 8099 \catcode`\\=\active 8100} 8101 8102\def\macrolineargctxt{% used for whole-line arguments without braces 8103 \scanctxt 8104 \catcode`\@=\other 8105 \catcode`\{=\other 8106 \catcode`\}=\other 8107} 8108 8109% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. 8110% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N 8111% where N is the macro parameter number. 8112% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so 8113% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. 8114% 8115{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active 8116 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} 8117 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} 8118} 8119\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} 8120 8121\def\margbackslash#1{\char`\#1 } 8122 8123\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} 8124\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} 8125 8126\def\macroxxx#1{% 8127 \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist 8128 \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments 8129 \paramno=0\relax 8130 \else 8131 \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% 8132 \if\paramno>256\relax 8133 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined 8134 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8135 \errmessage{You need eTeX to compile a file with macros with more than 256 arguments} 8136 \fi 8137 \fi 8138 \fi 8139 \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname 8140 \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% 8141 \else 8142 \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax 8143 \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi 8144 \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% 8145 \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1% 8146 \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}% 8147 \fi 8148 \begingroup \macrobodyctxt 8149 \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody 8150 \else \expandafter\parsemacbody 8151 \fi} 8152 8153\parseargdef\unmacro{% 8154 \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname 8155 \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% 8156 \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0% 8157 % Remove the macro name from \macrolist: 8158 \begingroup 8159 \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax 8160 \let\commondummyword\unmacrodo 8161 \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}% 8162 \endgroup 8163 \else 8164 \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% 8165 \fi 8166} 8167 8168% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any 8169% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax. 8170% 8171\def\unmacrodo#1{% 8172 \ifx #1\relax 8173 % remove this 8174 \else 8175 \noexpand\commondummyword \noexpand#1% 8176 \fi 8177} 8178 8179% \getargs -- Parse the arguments to a @macro line. Set \macname to 8180% the name of the macro, and \argl to the braced argument list. 8181\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} 8182\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} 8183\def\getmacname#1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} 8184\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} 8185% This made use of the feature that if the last token of a 8186% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by 8187% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. 8188 8189% Parse the optional {params} list to @macro or @rmacro. 8190% Set \paramno to the number of arguments, 8191% and \paramlist to a parameter text for the macro (e.g. #1,#2,#3 for a 8192% three-param macro.) Define \macarg.BLAH for each BLAH in the params 8193% list to some hook where the argument is to be expanded. If there are 8194% less than 10 arguments that hook is to be replaced by ##N where N 8195% is the position in that list, that is to say the macro arguments are to be 8196% defined `a la TeX in the macro body. 8197% 8198% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). 8199% 8200% If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used: see 8201% \parsemmanyargdef. 8202% 8203\def\parsemargdef#1;{% 8204 \paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% 8205 \let\hash\relax 8206 % \hash is redefined to `#' later to get it into definitions 8207 \let\xeatspaces\relax 8208 \let\xempty\relax 8209 \parsemargdefxxx#1,;,% 8210 \ifnum\paramno<10\relax\else 8211 \paramno0\relax 8212 \parsemmanyargdef@@#1,;,% 10 or more arguments 8213 \fi 8214} 8215\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% 8216 \if#1;\let\next=\relax 8217 \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx 8218 \advance\paramno by 1 8219 \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname 8220 {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno\noexpand\xempty{}}}% 8221 \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% 8222 \fi\next} 8223% the \xempty{} is to give \eatleadingcr an argument in the case of an 8224% empty macro argument. 8225 8226% \parsemacbody, \parsermacbody 8227% 8228% Read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. (They're different since 8229% rec and nonrec macros end differently.) 8230% 8231% We are in \macrobodyctxt, and the \xdef causes backslashshes in the macro 8232% body to be transformed. 8233% Set \macrobody to the body of the macro, and call \defmacro. 8234% 8235{\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsemacbody#1@end macro{% 8236\xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}}% 8237{\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro{% 8238\xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}}% 8239 8240% Make @ a letter, so that we can make private-to-Texinfo macro names. 8241\edef\texiatcatcode{\the\catcode`\@} 8242\catcode `@=11\relax 8243 8244%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Code for > 10 arguments only %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8245 8246% If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used, where the 8247% hook remains in the body, and when macro is to be expanded the body is 8248% processed again to replace the arguments. 8249% 8250% In that case, the hook is \the\toks N-1, and we simply set \toks N-1 to the 8251% argument N value and then \edef the body (nothing else will expand because of 8252% the catcode regime under which the body was input). 8253% 8254% If you compile with TeX (not eTeX), and you have macros with 10 or more 8255% arguments, no macro can have more than 256 arguments (else error). 8256% 8257% In case that there are 10 or more arguments we parse again the arguments 8258% list to set new definitions for the \macarg.BLAH macros corresponding to 8259% each BLAH argument. It was anyhow needed to parse already once this list 8260% in order to count the arguments, and as macros with at most 9 arguments 8261% are by far more frequent than macro with 10 or more arguments, defining 8262% twice the \macarg.BLAH macros does not cost too much processing power. 8263\def\parsemmanyargdef@@#1,{% 8264 \if#1;\let\next=\relax 8265 \else 8266 \let\next=\parsemmanyargdef@@ 8267 \edef\tempb{\eatspaces{#1}}% 8268 \expandafter\def\expandafter\tempa 8269 \expandafter{\csname macarg.\tempb\endcsname}% 8270 % Note that we need some extra \noexpand\noexpand, this is because we 8271 % don't want \the to be expanded in the \parsermacbody as it uses an 8272 % \xdef . 8273 \expandafter\edef\tempa 8274 {\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\the\toks\the\paramno}% 8275 \advance\paramno by 1\relax 8276 \fi\next} 8277 8278 8279\let\endargs@\relax 8280\let\nil@\relax 8281\def\nilm@{\nil@}% 8282\long\def\nillm@{\nil@}% 8283 8284% This macro is expanded during the Texinfo macro expansion, not during its 8285% definition. It gets all the arguments' values and assigns them to macros 8286% macarg.ARGNAME 8287% 8288% #1 is the macro name 8289% #2 is the list of argument names 8290% #3 is the list of argument values 8291\def\getargvals@#1#2#3{% 8292 \def\macargdeflist@{}% 8293 \def\saveparamlist@{#2}% Need to keep a copy for parameter expansion. 8294 \def\paramlist{#2,\nil@}% 8295 \def\macroname{#1}% 8296 \begingroup 8297 \macroargctxt 8298 \def\argvaluelist{#3,\nil@}% 8299 \def\@tempa{#3}% 8300 \ifx\@tempa\empty 8301 \setemptyargvalues@ 8302 \else 8303 \getargvals@@ 8304 \fi 8305} 8306\def\getargvals@@{% 8307 \ifx\paramlist\nilm@ 8308 % Some sanity check needed here that \argvaluelist is also empty. 8309 \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@ 8310 \else 8311 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8312 \errmessage{Too many arguments in macro `\macroname'!}% 8313 \fi 8314 \let\next\macargexpandinbody@ 8315 \else 8316 \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@ 8317 % No more arguments values passed to macro. Set remaining named-arg 8318 % macros to empty. 8319 \let\next\setemptyargvalues@ 8320 \else 8321 % pop current arg name into \@tempb 8322 \def\@tempa##1{\pop@{\@tempb}{\paramlist}##1\endargs@}% 8323 \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\paramlist}% 8324 % pop current argument value into \@tempc 8325 \def\@tempa##1{\longpop@{\@tempc}{\argvaluelist}##1\endargs@}% 8326 \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\argvaluelist}% 8327 % Here \@tempb is the current arg name and \@tempc is the current arg value. 8328 % First place the new argument macro definition into \@tempd 8329 \expandafter\macname\expandafter{\@tempc}% 8330 \expandafter\let\csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname\relax 8331 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempe\expandafter{% 8332 \csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname}% 8333 \edef\@tempd{\long\def\@tempe{\the\macname}}% 8334 \push@\@tempd\macargdeflist@ 8335 \let\next\getargvals@@ 8336 \fi 8337 \fi 8338 \next 8339} 8340 8341\def\push@#1#2{% 8342 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def 8343 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#2% 8344 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{% 8345 \expandafter#1#2}% 8346} 8347 8348% Replace arguments by their values in the macro body, and place the result 8349% in macro \@tempa. 8350% 8351\def\macvalstoargs@{% 8352 % To do this we use the property that token registers that are \the'ed 8353 % within an \edef expand only once. So we are going to place all argument 8354 % values into respective token registers. 8355 % 8356 % First we save the token context, and initialize argument numbering. 8357 \begingroup 8358 \paramno0\relax 8359 % Then, for each argument number #N, we place the corresponding argument 8360 % value into a new token list register \toks#N 8361 \expandafter\putargsintokens@\saveparamlist@,;,% 8362 % Then, we expand the body so that argument are replaced by their 8363 % values. The trick for values not to be expanded themselves is that they 8364 % are within tokens and that tokens expand only once in an \edef . 8365 \edef\@tempc{\csname mac.\macroname .body\endcsname}% 8366 % Now we restore the token stack pointer to free the token list registers 8367 % which we have used, but we make sure that expanded body is saved after 8368 % group. 8369 \expandafter 8370 \endgroup 8371 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempc}% 8372 } 8373 8374% Define the named-macro outside of this group and then close this group. 8375% 8376\def\macargexpandinbody@{% 8377 \expandafter 8378 \endgroup 8379 \macargdeflist@ 8380 % First the replace in body the macro arguments by their values, the result 8381 % is in \@tempa . 8382 \macvalstoargs@ 8383 % Then we point at the \norecurse or \gobble (for recursive) macro value 8384 % with \@tempb . 8385 \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempb\csname mac.\macroname .recurse\endcsname 8386 % Depending on whether it is recursive or not, we need some tailing 8387 % \egroup . 8388 \ifx\@tempb\gobble 8389 \let\@tempc\relax 8390 \else 8391 \let\@tempc\egroup 8392 \fi 8393 % And now we do the real job: 8394 \edef\@tempd{\noexpand\@tempb{\macroname}\noexpand\scanmacro{\@tempa}\@tempc}% 8395 \@tempd 8396} 8397 8398\def\putargsintokens@#1,{% 8399 \if#1;\let\next\relax 8400 \else 8401 \let\next\putargsintokens@ 8402 % First we allocate the new token list register, and give it a temporary 8403 % alias \@tempb . 8404 \toksdef\@tempb\the\paramno 8405 % Then we place the argument value into that token list register. 8406 \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname macarg.#1\endcsname 8407 \expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\@tempa}% 8408 \advance\paramno by 1\relax 8409 \fi 8410 \next 8411} 8412 8413% Trailing missing arguments are set to empty. 8414% 8415\def\setemptyargvalues@{% 8416 \ifx\paramlist\nilm@ 8417 \let\next\macargexpandinbody@ 8418 \else 8419 \expandafter\setemptyargvaluesparser@\paramlist\endargs@ 8420 \let\next\setemptyargvalues@ 8421 \fi 8422 \next 8423} 8424 8425\def\setemptyargvaluesparser@#1,#2\endargs@{% 8426 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{% 8427 \expandafter\def\csname macarg.#1\endcsname{}}% 8428 \push@\@tempa\macargdeflist@ 8429 \def\paramlist{#2}% 8430} 8431 8432% #1 is the element target macro 8433% #2 is the list macro 8434% #3,#4\endargs@ is the list value 8435\def\pop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{% 8436 \def#1{#3}% 8437 \def#2{#4}% 8438} 8439\long\def\longpop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{% 8440 \long\def#1{#3}% 8441 \long\def#2{#4}% 8442} 8443 8444 8445%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of code for > 10 arguments %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8446 8447 8448% This defines a Texinfo @macro or @rmacro, called by \parsemacbody. 8449% \macrobody has the body of the macro in it, with placeholders for 8450% its parameters, looking like "\xeatspaces{\hash 1}". 8451% \paramno is the number of parameters 8452% \paramlist is a TeX parameter text, e.g. "#1,#2,#3," 8453% There are four cases: macros of zero, one, up to nine, and many arguments. 8454% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file 8455% they're defined in: @include reads the file inside a group. 8456% 8457\def\defmacro{% 8458 \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars 8459 \ifnum\paramno=1 8460 \def\xeatspaces##1{##1}% 8461 % This removes the pair of braces around the argument. We don't 8462 % use \eatspaces, because this can cause ends of lines to be lost 8463 % when the argument to \eatspaces is read, leading to line-based 8464 % commands like "@itemize" not being read correctly. 8465 \else 8466 \let\xeatspaces\relax % suppress expansion 8467 \fi 8468 \ifcase\paramno 8469 % 0 8470 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8471 \bgroup 8472 \noexpand\spaceisspace 8473 \noexpand\endlineisspace 8474 \noexpand\expandafter % skip any whitespace after the macro name. 8475 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname}% 8476 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname{% 8477 \egroup 8478 \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}% 8479 \or % 1 8480 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8481 \bgroup 8482 \noexpand\braceorline 8483 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname}% 8484 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{% 8485 \egroup 8486 \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}% 8487 }% 8488 \else % at most 9 8489 \ifnum\paramno<10\relax 8490 % @MACNAME sets the context for reading the macro argument 8491 % @MACNAME@@ gets the argument, processes backslashes and appends a 8492 % comma. 8493 % @MACNAME@@@ removes braces surrounding the argument list. 8494 % @MACNAME@@@@ scans the macro body with arguments substituted. 8495 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8496 \bgroup 8497 \noexpand\expandafter % This \expandafter skip any spaces after the 8498 \noexpand\macroargctxt % macro before we change the catcode of space. 8499 \noexpand\expandafter 8500 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname}% 8501 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname##1{% 8502 \noexpand\passargtomacro 8503 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname{##1,}}% 8504 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{% 8505 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname ##1}% 8506 \expandafter\expandafter 8507 \expandafter\xdef 8508 \expandafter\expandafter 8509 \csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname\paramlist{% 8510 \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}% 8511 \else % 10 or more: 8512 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8513 \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}% 8514 }% 8515 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\macrobody 8516 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\gobble 8517 \fi 8518 \fi} 8519 8520\catcode `\@\texiatcatcode\relax % end private-to-Texinfo catcodes 8521 8522\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} 8523 8524 8525%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8526% 8527{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=13 % We need to manipulate \ so use @ as escape 8528@catcode`@_=11 % private names 8529@catcode`@!=11 % used as argument separator 8530 8531% \passargtomacro#1#2 - 8532% Call #1 with a list of tokens #2, with any doubled backslashes in #2 8533% compressed to one. 8534% 8535% This implementation works by expansion, and not execution (so we cannot use 8536% \def or similar). This reduces the risk of this failing in contexts where 8537% complete expansion is done with no execution (for example, in writing out to 8538% an auxiliary file for an index entry). 8539% 8540% State is kept in the input stream: the argument passed to 8541% @look_ahead, @gobble_and_check_finish and @add_segment is 8542% 8543% THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT ! {PENDING_BS} NEXT_TOKEN (... rest of input) 8544% 8545% where: 8546% THE_MACRO - name of the macro we want to call 8547% ARG_RESULT - argument list we build to pass to that macro 8548% PENDING_BS - either a backslash or nothing 8549% NEXT_TOKEN - used to look ahead in the input stream to see what's coming next 8550 8551@gdef@passargtomacro#1#2{% 8552 @add_segment #1!{}@relax#2\@_finish\% 8553} 8554@gdef@_finish{@_finishx} @global@let@_finishx@relax 8555 8556% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT 8557% #2 - PENDING_BS 8558% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN 8559% #4 used to look ahead 8560% 8561% If the next token is not a backslash, process the rest of the argument; 8562% otherwise, remove the next token. 8563@gdef@look_ahead#1!#2#3#4{% 8564 @ifx#4\% 8565 @expandafter@gobble_and_check_finish 8566 @else 8567 @expandafter@add_segment 8568 @fi#1!{#2}#4#4% 8569} 8570 8571% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT 8572% #2 - PENDING_BS 8573% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN 8574% #4 should be a backslash, which is gobbled. 8575% #5 looks ahead 8576% 8577% Double backslash found. Add a single backslash, and look ahead. 8578@gdef@gobble_and_check_finish#1!#2#3#4#5{% 8579 @add_segment#1\!{}#5#5% 8580} 8581 8582@gdef@is_fi{@fi} 8583 8584% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT 8585% #2 - PENDING_BS 8586% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN 8587% #4 is input stream until next backslash 8588% 8589% Input stream is either at the start of the argument, or just after a 8590% backslash sequence, either a lone backslash, or a doubled backslash. 8591% NEXT_TOKEN contains the first token in the input stream: if it is \finish, 8592% finish; otherwise, append to ARG_RESULT the segment of the argument up until 8593% the next backslash. PENDING_BACKSLASH contains a backslash to represent 8594% a backslash just before the start of the input stream that has not been 8595% added to ARG_RESULT. 8596@gdef@add_segment#1!#2#3#4\{% 8597@ifx#3@_finish 8598 @call_the_macro#1!% 8599@else 8600 % append the pending backslash to the result, followed by the next segment 8601 @expandafter@is_fi@look_ahead#1#2#4!{\}@fi 8602 % this @fi is discarded by @look_ahead. 8603 % we can't get rid of it with \expandafter because we don't know how 8604 % long #4 is. 8605} 8606 8607% #1 - THE_MACRO 8608% #2 - ARG_RESULT 8609% #3 discards the res of the conditional in @add_segment, and @is_fi ends the 8610% conditional. 8611@gdef@call_the_macro#1#2!#3@fi{@is_fi #1{#2}} 8612 8613} 8614%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8615 8616% \braceorline MAC is used for a one-argument macro MAC. It checks 8617% whether the next non-whitespace character is a {. It sets the context 8618% for reading the argument (slightly different in the two cases). Then, 8619% to read the argument, in the whole-line case, it then calls the regular 8620% \parsearg MAC; in the lbrace case, it calls \passargtomacro MAC. 8621% 8622\def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} 8623\def\braceorlinexxx{% 8624 \ifx\nchar\bgroup 8625 \macroargctxt 8626 \expandafter\passargtomacro 8627 \else 8628 \macrolineargctxt\expandafter\parsearg 8629 \fi \macnamexxx} 8630 8631 8632% @alias. 8633% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal 8634% sign. Make them active and then expand them all to nothing. 8635% 8636\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx} 8637\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} 8638\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{% 8639 {% 8640 \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty 8641 \addtomacrolist{#1}% 8642 \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}% 8643 }% 8644 \next 8645} 8646 8647 8648\message{cross references,} 8649 8650\newwrite\auxfile 8651\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. 8652\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. 8653 8654% @inforef is relatively simple. 8655\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} 8656\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{% 8657 \putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, 8658 node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} 8659 8660% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in 8661% cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and 8662% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like: 8663% @node foo , bar , ... 8664% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name. 8665% 8666\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse} 8667% 8668% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this: 8669% @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs 8670\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse} 8671\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}\omittopnode} 8672 8673% Used so that the @top node doesn't have to be wrapped in an @ifnottex 8674% conditional. 8675% \doignore goes to more effort to skip nested conditionals but we don't need 8676% that here. 8677\def\omittopnode{% 8678 \ifx\lastnode\wordTop 8679 \expandafter\ignorenode\fi 8680} 8681\def\wordTop{Top} 8682 8683% Until the next @node or @bye command, divert output to a box that is not 8684% output. 8685\def\ignorenode{\setbox\dummybox\vbox\bgroup\def\node{\egroup\node}% 8686\ignorenodebye 8687} 8688 8689{\let\bye\relax 8690\gdef\ignorenodebye{\let\bye\ignorenodebyedef} 8691\gdef\ignorenodebyedef{\egroup(`Top' node ignored)\bye}} 8692% The redefinition of \bye here is because it is declared \outer 8693 8694\let\lastnode=\empty 8695 8696% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the 8697% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing). 8698% 8699\def\donoderef#1{% 8700 \ifx\lastnode\empty\else 8701 \setref{\lastnode}{#1}% 8702 \global\let\lastnode=\empty 8703 \fi 8704} 8705 8706% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. 8707% 8708\newcount\savesfregister 8709% 8710\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} 8711\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} 8712\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} 8713 8714% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an 8715% anchor), which consists of three parts: 8716% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \currentsection, 8717% or the anchor name. 8718% 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or 8719% empty for anchors. 8720% 3) NAME-pg - the page number. 8721% 8722% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of 8723% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here: 8724% 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats. 8725% 8726\def\setref#1#2{% 8727 \pdfmkdest{#1}% 8728 \iflinks 8729 {% 8730 \requireauxfile 8731 \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them 8732 % match definition in \xrdef, \refx, \xrefX. 8733 \def\value##1{##1}% 8734 \edef\writexrdef##1##2{% 8735 \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef 8736 ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef 8737 }% 8738 \toks0 = \expandafter{\currentsection}% 8739 \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }% 8740 \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc. 8741 \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, at \shipout 8742 }% 8743 \fi 8744} 8745 8746% @xrefautosectiontitle on|off says whether @section(ing) names are used 8747% automatically in xrefs, if the third arg is not explicitly specified. 8748% This was provided as a "secret" @set xref-automatic-section-title 8749% variable, now it's official. 8750% 8751\parseargdef\xrefautomaticsectiontitle{% 8752 \def\temp{#1}% 8753 \ifx\temp\onword 8754 \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname 8755 = \empty 8756 \else\ifx\temp\offword 8757 \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname 8758 = \relax 8759 \else 8760 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8761 \errmessage{Unknown @xrefautomaticsectiontitle value `\temp', 8762 must be on|off}% 8763 \fi\fi 8764} 8765 8766% 8767% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is 8768% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed 8769% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed 8770% manual. All but the node name can be omitted. 8771% 8772\def\pxref{\putwordsee{} \xrefXX} 8773\def\xref{\putwordSee{} \xrefXX} 8774\def\ref{\xrefXX} 8775 8776\def\xrefXX#1{\def\xrefXXarg{#1}\futurelet\tokenafterxref\xrefXXX} 8777\def\xrefXXX{\expandafter\xrefX\expandafter[\xrefXXarg,,,,,,,]} 8778% 8779\newbox\toprefbox 8780\newbox\printedrefnamebox 8781\newbox\infofilenamebox 8782\newbox\printedmanualbox 8783% 8784\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup 8785 \unsepspaces 8786 % 8787 % Get args without leading/trailing spaces. 8788 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}% 8789 \setbox\printedrefnamebox = \hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}% 8790 % 8791 \def\infofilename{\ignorespaces #4}% 8792 \setbox\infofilenamebox = \hbox{\infofilename\unskip}% 8793 % 8794 \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% 8795 \setbox\printedmanualbox = \hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}% 8796 % 8797 % If the printed reference name (arg #3) was not explicitly given in 8798 % the @xref, figure out what we want to use. 8799 \ifdim \wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt 8800 % No printed node name was explicitly given. 8801 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname \relax 8802 % Not auto section-title: use node name inside the square brackets. 8803 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 8804 \else 8805 % Auto section-title: use chapter/section title inside 8806 % the square brackets if we have it. 8807 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 8808 % It is in another manual, so we don't have it; use node name. 8809 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 8810 \else 8811 \ifhavexrefs 8812 % We (should) know the real title if we have the xref values. 8813 \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}}% 8814 \else 8815 % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. 8816 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 8817 \fi% 8818 \fi 8819 \fi 8820 \fi 8821 % 8822 % Make link in pdf output. 8823 \ifpdf 8824 % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX 8825 {\indexnofonts 8826 \makevalueexpandable 8827 \turnoffactive 8828 % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _ 8829 % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in 8830 % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename. 8831 \getfilename{#4}% 8832 % 8833 % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing 8834 % spaces in #1, which should be ignored. 8835 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 8836 % 8837 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 8838 \def\pdfdestname{Top}% no empty targets 8839 \fi 8840 % 8841 \leavevmode 8842 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 8843 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 8844 goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfdestname}% 8845 \else 8846 goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfdestname}}% 8847 \fi 8848 }% 8849 \setcolor{\linkcolor}% 8850 \else 8851 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 8852 \else 8853 % For XeTeX 8854 {\indexnofonts 8855 \makevalueexpandable 8856 \turnoffactive 8857 % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _ 8858 % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in 8859 % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename. 8860 \getfilename{#4}% 8861 % 8862 % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing 8863 % spaces in #1, which should be ignored. 8864 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 8865 % 8866 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 8867 \def\pdfdestname{Top}% no empty targets 8868 \fi 8869 % 8870 \leavevmode 8871 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 8872 % With default settings, 8873 % XeTeX (xdvipdfmx) replaces link destination names with integers. 8874 % In this case, the replaced destination names of 8875 % remote PDFs are no longer known. In order to avoid a replacement, 8876 % you can use xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010'. 8877 % If you use XeTeX 0.99996+ (TeX Live 2016+), 8878 % this command line option is no longer necessary 8879 % because we can use the `dvipdfmx:config' special. 8880 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A 8881 << /S /GoToR /F (\the\filename.pdf) /D (\pdfdestname) >> >>}% 8882 \else 8883 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A 8884 << /S /GoTo /D (\pdfdestname) >> >>}% 8885 \fi 8886 }% 8887 \setcolor{\linkcolor}% 8888 \fi 8889 \fi 8890 {% 8891 % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to 8892 % include an _ in the xref name, etc. 8893 \indexnofonts 8894 \turnoffactive 8895 \def\value##1{##1}% 8896 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle 8897 \csname XR#1-title\endcsname 8898 }% 8899 % 8900 % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2" 8901 % instead of "[somenode], p.3". \iffloat distinguishes them by 8902 % \Xthisreftitle being set to a magic string. 8903 \iffloat\Xthisreftitle 8904 % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref, 8905 % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2". 8906 \ifdim\wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt 8907 \refx{#1-snt}% 8908 \else 8909 \printedrefname 8910 \fi 8911 % 8912 % If the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append 8913 % "in MANUALNAME". 8914 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 8915 \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% 8916 \fi 8917 \else 8918 % node/anchor (non-float) references. 8919 % 8920 % If we use \unhbox to print the node names, TeX does not insert 8921 % empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will not 8922 % find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals 8923 % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, 8924 % this is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name 8925 % again, so it is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. 8926 % 8927 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 8928 % Cross-manual reference with a printed manual name. 8929 % 8930 \crossmanualxref{\cite{\printedmanual\unskip}}% 8931 % 8932 \else\ifdim \wd\infofilenamebox > 0pt 8933 % Cross-manual reference with only an info filename (arg 4), no 8934 % printed manual name (arg 5). This is essentially the same as 8935 % the case above; we output the filename, since we have nothing else. 8936 % 8937 \crossmanualxref{\code{\infofilename\unskip}}% 8938 % 8939 \else 8940 % Reference within this manual. 8941 % 8942 % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty, as the ref 8943 % will be empty for @unnumbered and @anchor. 8944 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}}% 8945 \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi 8946 % 8947 % output the `[mynode]' via the macro below so it can be overridden. 8948 \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname 8949 % 8950 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiomitxrefpg\endcsname\relax 8951 % But we always want a comma and a space: 8952 ,\space 8953 % 8954 % output the `page 3'. 8955 \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}% 8956 % Add a , if xref followed by a space 8957 \if\space\noexpand\tokenafterxref ,% 8958 \else\ifx\ \tokenafterxref ,% @TAB 8959 \else\ifx\*\tokenafterxref ,% @* 8960 \else\ifx\ \tokenafterxref ,% @SPACE 8961 \else\ifx\ 8962 \tokenafterxref ,% @NL 8963 \else\ifx\tie\tokenafterxref ,% @tie 8964 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 8965 \fi 8966 \fi\fi 8967 \fi 8968 \endlink 8969\endgroup} 8970 8971% Output a cross-manual xref to #1. Used just above (twice). 8972% 8973% Only include the text "Section ``foo'' in" if the foo is neither 8974% missing or Top. Thus, @xref{,,,foo,The Foo Manual} outputs simply 8975% "see The Foo Manual", the idea being to refer to the whole manual. 8976% 8977% But, this being TeX, we can't easily compare our node name against the 8978% string "Top" while ignoring the possible spaces before and after in 8979% the input. By adding the arbitrary 7sp below, we make it much less 8980% likely that a real node name would have the same width as "Top" (e.g., 8981% in a monospaced font). Hopefully it will never happen in practice. 8982% 8983% For the same basic reason, we retypeset the "Top" at every 8984% reference, since the current font is indeterminate. 8985% 8986\def\crossmanualxref#1{% 8987 \setbox\toprefbox = \hbox{Top\kern7sp}% 8988 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \printedrefname \unskip \kern7sp}% 8989 \ifdim \wd2 > 7sp % nonempty? 8990 \ifdim \wd2 = \wd\toprefbox \else % same as Top? 8991 \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{}\space 8992 \fi 8993 \fi 8994 #1% 8995} 8996 8997% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref 8998% output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily, 8999% since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly 9000% one that Bob is working on :). 9001% 9002\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]} 9003 9004% Things referred to by \setref. 9005% 9006\def\Ynothing{} 9007\def\Yomitfromtoc{} 9008\def\Ynumbered{% 9009 \ifnum\secno=0 9010 \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno 9011 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 9012 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno 9013 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 9014 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 9015 \else 9016 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 9017 \fi\fi\fi 9018} 9019\def\Yappendix{% 9020 \ifnum\secno=0 9021 \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}% 9022 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 9023 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno 9024 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 9025 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 9026 \else 9027 \putwordSection@tie 9028 @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 9029 \fi\fi\fi 9030} 9031 9032% \refx{NAME} - reference a cross-reference string named NAME. 9033\def\refx#1{% 9034 \requireauxfile 9035 {% 9036 \indexnofonts 9037 \turnoffactive 9038 \def\value##1{##1}% 9039 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX 9040 \csname XR#1\endcsname 9041 }% 9042 \ifx\thisrefX\relax 9043 % If not defined, say something at least. 9044 \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright 9045 \iflinks 9046 \ifhavexrefs 9047 {\toks0 = {#1}% avoid expansion of possibly-complex value 9048 \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `\the\toks0'.}}% 9049 \else 9050 \ifwarnedxrefs\else 9051 \global\warnedxrefstrue 9052 \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% 9053 \fi 9054 \fi 9055 \fi 9056 \else 9057 % It's defined, so just use it. 9058 \thisrefX 9059 \fi 9060} 9061 9062% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Define a control 9063% sequence for a cross-reference target (we prepend XR to the control sequence 9064% name to avoid collisions). The value is the page number. If this is a float 9065% type, we have more work to do. 9066% 9067\def\xrdef#1#2{% 9068 {% Expand the node or anchor name to remove control sequences. 9069 % \turnoffactive stops 8-bit characters being changed to commands 9070 % like @'e. \refx does the same to retrieve the value in the definition. 9071 \indexnofonts 9072 \turnoffactive 9073 \def\value##1{##1}% 9074 \xdef\safexrefname{#1}% 9075 }% 9076 % 9077 \bgroup 9078 \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% 9079 \egroup 9080 % We put the \gdef inside a group to avoid the definitions building up on 9081 % TeX's save stack, which can cause it to run out of space for aux files with 9082 % thousands of lines. \gdef doesn't use the save stack, but \csname does 9083 % when it defines an unknown control sequence as \relax. 9084 % 9085 % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float? 9086 \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname 9087 % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype. 9088 \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist 9089 \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname 9090 % 9091 % Is this the first time we've seen this float type? 9092 \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax 9093 \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do 9094 \else 9095 % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list. 9096 \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}% 9097 \fi 9098 % 9099 % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE, 9100 % for later use in \listoffloats. 9101 \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0 9102 {\safexrefname}}% 9103 \fi 9104} 9105 9106% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to 9107% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. 9108% This is done with @novalidate at the beginning of the file. 9109% 9110\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. 9111\let\novalidate = \linksfalse 9112 9113% Used when writing to the aux file, or when using data from it. 9114\def\requireauxfile{% 9115 \iflinks 9116 \tryauxfile 9117 % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. 9118 \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux 9119 \fi 9120 \global\let\requireauxfile=\relax % Only do this once. 9121} 9122 9123% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. 9124% 9125\def\tryauxfile{% 9126 \openin 1 \jobname.aux 9127 \ifeof 1 \else 9128 \readdatafile{aux}% 9129 \global\havexrefstrue 9130 \fi 9131 \closein 1 9132} 9133 9134\def\setupdatafile{% 9135 \catcode`\^^@=\other 9136 \catcode`\^^A=\other 9137 \catcode`\^^B=\other 9138 \catcode`\^^C=\other 9139 \catcode`\^^D=\other 9140 \catcode`\^^E=\other 9141 \catcode`\^^F=\other 9142 \catcode`\^^G=\other 9143 \catcode`\^^H=\other 9144 \catcode`\^^K=\other 9145 \catcode`\^^L=\other 9146 \catcode`\^^N=\other 9147 \catcode`\^^P=\other 9148 \catcode`\^^Q=\other 9149 \catcode`\^^R=\other 9150 \catcode`\^^S=\other 9151 \catcode`\^^T=\other 9152 \catcode`\^^U=\other 9153 \catcode`\^^V=\other 9154 \catcode`\^^W=\other 9155 \catcode`\^^X=\other 9156 \catcode`\^^Z=\other 9157 \catcode`\^^[=\other 9158 \catcode`\^^\=\other 9159 \catcode`\^^]=\other 9160 \catcode`\^^^=\other 9161 \catcode`\^^_=\other 9162 \catcode`\^=\other 9163 % 9164 % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but... 9165 \catcode`\~=\other 9166 \catcode`\[=\other 9167 \catcode`\]=\other 9168 \catcode`\"=\other 9169 \catcode`\_=\active 9170 \catcode`\|=\active 9171 \catcode`\<=\active 9172 \catcode`\>=\active 9173 \catcode`\$=\other 9174 \catcode`\#=\other 9175 \catcode`\&=\other 9176 \catcode`\%=\other 9177 \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off 9178 % 9179 \catcode`\\=\active 9180 % 9181 % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces. 9182 \catcode`\{=1 9183 \catcode`\}=2 9184 \catcode`\@=0 9185} 9186 9187\def\readdatafile#1{% 9188\begingroup 9189 \setupdatafile 9190 \input\jobname.#1 9191\endgroup} 9192 9193 9194\message{insertions,} 9195% including footnotes. 9196 9197\newcount \footnoteno 9198 9199% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is 9200% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a 9201% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is 9202% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a 9203% space to prevent strange expansion errors.) 9204\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } 9205 9206% @footnotestyle is meaningful for Info output only. 9207\let\footnotestyle=\comment 9208 9209{\catcode `\@=11 9210% 9211% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. 9212\gdef\footnote{% 9213 \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne 9214 \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% 9215 % 9216 % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the 9217 % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. 9218 \let\@sf\empty 9219 \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi 9220 % 9221 % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. 9222 \unskip 9223 \thisfootno\@sf 9224 \dofootnote 9225}% 9226 9227% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the 9228% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. 9229% 9230% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses 9231% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when 9232% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. 9233% 9234\gdef\dofootnote{% 9235 \insert\footins\bgroup 9236 % 9237 % Nested footnotes are not supported in TeX, that would take a lot 9238 % more work. (\startsavinginserts does not suffice.) 9239 \let\footnote=\errfootnotenest 9240 % 9241 % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the 9242 % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. 9243 % So reset some parameters. 9244 \hsize=\txipagewidth 9245 \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty 9246 \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes 9247 \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox 9248 \floatingpenalty\@MM 9249 \leftskip\z@skip 9250 \rightskip\z@skip 9251 \spaceskip\z@skip 9252 \xspaceskip\z@skip 9253 \parindent\defaultparindent 9254 % 9255 \smallfonts \rm 9256 % 9257 % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears 9258 % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use 9259 % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote 9260 % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style). 9261 \let\noindent = \relax 9262 % 9263 % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the 9264 % footnote extends for more than one paragraph. 9265 \everypar = {\hang}% 9266 \textindent{\thisfootno}% 9267 % 9268 % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this 9269 % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it 9270 % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. 9271 \footstrut 9272 % 9273 % Invoke rest of plain TeX footnote routine. 9274 \futurelet\next\fo@t 9275} 9276}%end \catcode `\@=11 9277 9278\def\errfootnotenest{% 9279 \errhelp=\EMsimple 9280 \errmessage{Nested footnotes not supported in texinfo.tex, 9281 even though they work in makeinfo; sorry} 9282} 9283 9284\def\errfootnoteheading{% 9285 \errhelp=\EMsimple 9286 \errmessage{Footnotes in chapters, sections, etc., are not supported} 9287} 9288 9289% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create 9290% the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion 9291% would be lost. 9292% Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote 9293% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished. 9294% And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03. 9295% 9296% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro. 9297% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled 9298% out prematurely. 9299% 9300\def\startsavinginserts{% 9301 \ifx \insert\ptexinsert 9302 \let\insert\saveinsert 9303 \else 9304 \let\checkinserts\relax 9305 \fi 9306} 9307 9308% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and 9309% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}. 9310% 9311\def\saveinsert#1{% 9312 \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}% 9313 \afterassignment\next 9314 % swallow the left brace 9315 \let\temp = 9316} 9317\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}} 9318\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1} 9319 9320\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi} 9321 9322\def\placesaveins#1{% 9323 \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname 9324 {\box#1}% 9325} 9326 9327% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other: 9328{ 9329 \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-) 9330 \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{} 9331} 9332 9333% initialization: 9334\def\newsaveins #1{% 9335 \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}% 9336 \next 9337} 9338\def\newsaveinsX #1{% 9339 \csname newbox\endcsname #1% 9340 \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts 9341 \checksaveins #1}% 9342} 9343 9344% initialize: 9345\let\checkinserts\empty 9346\newsaveins\footins 9347\newsaveins\margin 9348 9349 9350% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. 9351% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. 9352% 9353% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image 9354% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get 9355% undone and the next image would fail. 9356\openin 1 = epsf.tex 9357\ifeof 1 \else 9358 % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in 9359 % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan). 9360 \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% 9361 \input epsf.tex 9362\fi 9363\closein 1 9364% 9365% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. 9366\newif\ifwarnednoepsf 9367\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to 9368 work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get 9369 it from https://ctan.org/texarchive/macros/texinfo/texinfo/doc/epsf.tex.} 9370% 9371\def\image#1{% 9372 \ifx\epsfbox\thisisundefined 9373 \ifwarnednoepsf \else 9374 \errhelp = \noepsfhelp 9375 \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% 9376 \global\warnednoepsftrue 9377 \fi 9378 \else 9379 \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish 9380 \fi 9381} 9382% 9383% Arguments to @image: 9384% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. 9385% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. 9386% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text. 9387% #5 is (ignored optional) extension. 9388% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing stuff. 9389\newif\ifimagevmode 9390\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup 9391 \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example 9392 \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names 9393 \makevalueexpandable 9394 % If the image is by itself, center it. 9395 \ifvmode 9396 \imagevmodetrue 9397 \else \ifx\centersub\centerV 9398 % for @center @image, we need a vbox so we can have our vertical space 9399 \imagevmodetrue 9400 \vbox\bgroup % vbox has better behavior than vtop herev 9401 \fi\fi 9402 % 9403 \ifimagevmode 9404 \medskip 9405 % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert 9406 % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space 9407 % above and below. 9408 \nobreak\vskip\parskip 9409 \nobreak 9410 \fi 9411 % 9412 % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing 9413 % environment such as @quotation is respected. 9414 % However, if we're at the top level, we don't want the 9415 % normal paragraph indentation. 9416 % On the other hand, if we are in the case of @center @image, we don't 9417 % want to start a paragraph, which will create a hsize-width box and 9418 % eradicate the centering. 9419 \ifx\centersub\centerV \else \imageindent \fi 9420 % 9421 % Output the image. 9422 \ifpdf 9423 % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX <= 0.80 9424 \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}% 9425 \else 9426 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9427 % For epsf.tex 9428 % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. 9429 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 9430 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi 9431 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 9432 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi 9433 \epsfbox{#1.eps}% 9434 \else 9435 % For XeTeX 9436 \doxeteximage{#1}{#2}{#3}% 9437 \fi 9438 \fi 9439 % 9440 \ifimagevmode 9441 \medskip % space after a standalone image 9442 \fi 9443 \ifx\centersub\centerV \egroup \fi 9444\endgroup} 9445 9446 9447% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables, 9448% etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the 9449% float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future. 9450% 9451\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish} 9452 9453% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it. 9454\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,} 9455 9456% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically 9457% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted, 9458% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to. 9459% 9460% #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to 9461% be referable. 9462% 9463% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It 9464% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom). 9465% 9466% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each 9467% chapter-level command. 9468\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty 9469% 9470\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% 9471 \let\thiscaption=\empty 9472 \let\thisshortcaption=\empty 9473 % 9474 % don't lose footnotes inside @float. 9475 % 9476 % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an 9477 % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 9478 % 9479 \startsavinginserts 9480 % 9481 % We can't be used inside a paragraph. 9482 \par 9483 % 9484 \vtop\bgroup 9485 \def\floattype{#1}% 9486 \def\floatlabel{#2}% 9487 \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet. 9488 % 9489 \ifx\floattype\empty 9490 \let\safefloattype=\empty 9491 \else 9492 {% 9493 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 9494 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 9495 \indexnofonts 9496 \turnoffactive 9497 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 9498 }% 9499 \fi 9500 % 9501 % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type. 9502 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 9503 % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1, 9504 % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.) 9505 % 9506 \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname 9507 \global\advance\floatno by 1 9508 % 9509 {% 9510 % This magic value for \currentsection is output by \setref as the 9511 % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float 9512 % labels (which have a completely different output format) from 9513 % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the 9514 % lists of floats. 9515 % 9516 \edef\currentsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}% 9517 \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}% 9518 }% 9519 \fi 9520 % 9521 % start with \parskip glue, I guess. 9522 \vskip\parskip 9523 % 9524 % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section. 9525 \restorefirstparagraphindent 9526} 9527 9528% we have these possibilities: 9529% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap 9530% @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1 9531% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap 9532% @float Foo & no caption: Foo 9533% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap 9534% @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1 9535% @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap 9536% @float & no caption: 9537% 9538\def\Efloat{% 9539 \let\floatident = \empty 9540 % 9541 % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first. 9542 \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi 9543 % 9544 % If we have an xref label, the number comes next. 9545 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 9546 \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first. 9547 \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}% 9548 \fi 9549 % the number. 9550 \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 9551 \fi 9552 % 9553 % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in 9554 % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again. 9555 \let\captionline = \floatident 9556 % 9557 \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else 9558 \ifx\floatident\empty \else 9559 \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between 9560 \fi 9561 % 9562 % caption text. 9563 \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}% 9564 \fi 9565 % 9566 % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before. 9567 % Eventually this needs to become an \insert. 9568 \ifx\captionline\empty \else 9569 \vskip.5\parskip 9570 \captionline 9571 % 9572 % Space below caption. 9573 \vskip\parskip 9574 \fi 9575 % 9576 % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this 9577 % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint. 9578 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 9579 % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as 9580 % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short 9581 % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing. 9582 {% 9583 \requireauxfile 9584 \atdummies 9585 % 9586 \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty 9587 \def\gtemp{\thiscaption}% 9588 \else 9589 \def\gtemp{\thisshortcaption}% 9590 \fi 9591 \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident 9592 \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}% 9593 }% 9594 \fi 9595 \egroup % end of \vtop 9596 % 9597 \checkinserts 9598} 9599 9600% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either. 9601% 9602\def\appendtomacro#1#2{% 9603 \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}% 9604} 9605 9606% @caption, @shortcaption 9607% 9608\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption} 9609\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption} 9610\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption} 9611\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}} 9612 9613% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are 9614% going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno. 9615\def\getfloatno#1{% 9616 \ifx#1\relax 9617 % Haven't seen this figure type before. 9618 \csname newcount\endcsname #1% 9619 % 9620 % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap. 9621 \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos 9622 \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }% 9623 \fi 9624 \let\floatno#1% 9625} 9626 9627% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref 9628% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we 9629% first read the @float command. 9630% 9631\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 9632 9633% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can 9634% distinguish floats from other xref types. 9635\def\floatmagic{!!float!!} 9636 9637% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional 9638% which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic 9639% \currentsection value which we \setref above. 9640% 9641\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish} 9642% 9643% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the 9644% (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2. 9645% 9646\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{% 9647 \def\temp{#1}% 9648 \def\iffloattype{#2}% 9649 \ifx\temp\floatmagic 9650} 9651 9652% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents. 9653% 9654\parseargdef\listoffloats{% 9655 \def\floattype{#1}% floattype 9656 {% 9657 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 9658 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 9659 \indexnofonts 9660 \turnoffactive 9661 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 9662 }% 9663 % 9664 % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE. 9665 \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax 9666 \ifhavexrefs 9667 % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo. 9668 \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}% 9669 \fi 9670 \else 9671 \begingroup 9672 \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc 9673 \let\do=\listoffloatsdo 9674 \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname 9675 \endgroup 9676 \fi 9677} 9678 9679% This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the 9680% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the 9681% aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which 9682% has the text we're supposed to typeset here. 9683% 9684% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since 9685% they won't appear in the aux file). 9686% 9687\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish} 9688\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{% 9689 % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just 9690 % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the 9691 % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link 9692 % in pdf output. 9693 \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}% 9694 % 9695 % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index. 9696 \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}% 9697 \writeentry 9698}} 9699 9700 9701\message{localization,} 9702 9703% For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very 9704% early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language 9705% (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation. 9706% 9707{ 9708 \catcode`\_ = \active 9709 \globaldefs=1 9710\parseargdef\documentlanguage{% 9711 \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. 9712 % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists. 9713 \let_ = \normalunderscore % normal _ character for filename test 9714 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 9715 \ifeof 1 9716 \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore #1_\finish 9717 \else 9718 \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist 9719 \input txi-#1.tex 9720 \fi 9721 \closein 1 9722 \endgroup % end raw TeX 9723} 9724% 9725% If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist, 9726% try txi-de.tex. 9727% 9728\gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{% 9729 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 9730 \ifeof 1 9731 \errhelp = \nolanghelp 9732 \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% 9733 \else 9734 \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist 9735 \input txi-#1.tex 9736 \fi 9737 \closein 1 9738} 9739}% end of special _ catcode 9740% 9741\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or 9742is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current 9743directory should work if nowhere else does.} 9744 9745% This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the 9746% \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and 9747% third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin. 9748% 9749% The language names to pass are determined when the format is built. 9750% See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g., 9751% /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log. 9752% 9753% With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all 9754% available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in 9755% Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the 9756% accented characters problem.) 9757% 9758\catcode`@=11 9759\def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{% 9760 % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX. 9761 \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax 9762 \message{no patterns for #1}% 9763 \else 9764 \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname 9765 \fi 9766 % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless. 9767 \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax 9768 \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax 9769} 9770 9771% XeTeX and LuaTeX can handle Unicode natively. 9772% Their default I/O uses UTF-8 sequences instead of a byte-wise operation. 9773% Other TeX engines' I/O (pdfTeX, etc.) is byte-wise. 9774% 9775\newif\iftxinativeunicodecapable 9776\newif\iftxiusebytewiseio 9777 9778\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9779 \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 9780 \txinativeunicodecapablefalse 9781 \txiusebytewiseiotrue 9782 \else 9783 \txinativeunicodecapabletrue 9784 \txiusebytewiseiofalse 9785 \fi 9786\else 9787 \txinativeunicodecapabletrue 9788 \txiusebytewiseiofalse 9789\fi 9790 9791% Set I/O by bytes instead of UTF-8 sequence for XeTeX and LuaTex 9792% for non-UTF-8 (byte-wise) encodings. 9793% 9794\def\setbytewiseio{% 9795 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9796 \else 9797 \XeTeXdefaultencoding "bytes" % For subsequent files to be read 9798 \XeTeXinputencoding "bytes" % For document root file 9799 % Unfortunately, there seems to be no corresponding XeTeX command for 9800 % output encoding. This is a problem for auxiliary index and TOC files. 9801 % The only solution would be perhaps to write out @U{...} sequences in 9802 % place of non-ASCII characters. 9803 \fi 9804 9805 \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 9806 \else 9807 \directlua{ 9808 local utf8_char, byte, gsub = unicode.utf8.char, string.byte, string.gsub 9809 local function convert_char (char) 9810 return utf8_char(byte(char)) 9811 end 9812 9813 local function convert_line (line) 9814 return gsub(line, ".", convert_char) 9815 end 9816 9817 callback.register("process_input_buffer", convert_line) 9818 9819 local function convert_line_out (line) 9820 local line_out = "" 9821 for c in string.utfvalues(line) do 9822 line_out = line_out .. string.char(c) 9823 end 9824 return line_out 9825 end 9826 9827 callback.register("process_output_buffer", convert_line_out) 9828 } 9829 \fi 9830 9831 \txiusebytewiseiotrue 9832} 9833 9834 9835% Helpers for encodings. 9836% Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number. 9837% 9838\def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{% 9839 \count255=128 9840 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 9841 \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax 9842 \advance\count255 by 1 9843 \repeat 9844} 9845 9846\def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{% 9847 \count255=128 9848 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 9849 \catcode\count255=#1\relax 9850 \advance\count255 by 1 9851 \repeat 9852} 9853 9854% @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters 9855% according to the specified encoding. 9856% 9857\def\documentencoding{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\documentencodingzzz} 9858\def\documentencodingzzz#1{% 9859 % 9860 % Encoding being declared for the document. 9861 \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}% 9862 % 9863 % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able 9864 % to compare them with \ifx. 9865 \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}% 9866 \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}% 9867 \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}% 9868 \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}% 9869 \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}% 9870 % 9871 \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii 9872 \asciichardefs 9873 % 9874 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo 9875 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9876 \setbytewiseio 9877 \fi 9878 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9879 \lattwochardefs 9880 % 9881 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 9882 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9883 \setbytewiseio 9884 \fi 9885 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9886 \latonechardefs 9887 % 9888 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine 9889 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9890 \setbytewiseio 9891 \fi 9892 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9893 \latninechardefs 9894 % 9895 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 9896 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9897 % For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX) 9898 \nativeunicodechardefs 9899 \else 9900 % For treating UTF-8 as byte sequences (TeX, eTeX and pdfTeX) 9901 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9902 % since we already invoked \utfeightchardefs at the top level 9903 % (below), do not re-invoke it, otherwise our check for duplicated 9904 % definitions gets triggered. Making non-ascii chars active is 9905 % sufficient. 9906 \fi 9907 % 9908 \else 9909 \message{Ignoring unknown document encoding: #1.}% 9910 % 9911 \fi % utfeight 9912 \fi % latnine 9913 \fi % latone 9914 \fi % lattwo 9915 \fi % ascii 9916 % 9917 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9918 \else 9919 \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 9920 \else 9921 \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii 9922 \else 9923 \message{Warning: XeTeX with non-UTF-8 encodings cannot handle % 9924 non-ASCII characters in auxiliary files.}% 9925 \fi 9926 \fi 9927 \fi 9928} 9929 9930% emacs-page 9931% A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available 9932% the default font encoding (OT1). 9933% 9934\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing, sorry: #1.}} 9935 9936% Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference. 9937\def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi} 9938 9939% First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be 9940% correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of 9941% macros containing the character definitions. 9942\setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9943% 9944 9945\def\gdefchar#1#2{% 9946\gdef#1{% 9947 \ifpassthroughchars 9948 \string#1% 9949 \else 9950 #2% 9951 \fi 9952}} 9953 9954% Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions. 9955\def\latonechardefs{% 9956 \gdefchar^^a0{\tie} 9957 \gdefchar^^a1{\exclamdown} 9958 \gdefchar^^a2{{\tcfont \char162}} % cent 9959 \gdefchar^^a3{\pounds{}} 9960 \gdefchar^^a4{{\tcfont \char164}} % currency 9961 \gdefchar^^a5{{\tcfont \char165}} % yen 9962 \gdefchar^^a6{{\tcfont \char166}} % broken bar 9963 \gdefchar^^a7{\S} 9964 \gdefchar^^a8{\"{}} 9965 \gdefchar^^a9{\copyright{}} 9966 \gdefchar^^aa{\ordf} 9967 \gdefchar^^ab{\guillemetleft{}} 9968 \gdefchar^^ac{\ensuremath\lnot} 9969 \gdefchar^^ad{\-} 9970 \gdefchar^^ae{\registeredsymbol{}} 9971 \gdefchar^^af{\={}} 9972 % 9973 \gdefchar^^b0{\textdegree} 9974 \gdefchar^^b1{$\pm$} 9975 \gdefchar^^b2{$^2$} 9976 \gdefchar^^b3{$^3$} 9977 \gdefchar^^b4{\'{}} 9978 \gdefchar^^b5{$\mu$} 9979 \gdefchar^^b6{\P} 9980 \gdefchar^^b7{\ensuremath\cdot} 9981 \gdefchar^^b8{\cedilla\ } 9982 \gdefchar^^b9{$^1$} 9983 \gdefchar^^ba{\ordm} 9984 \gdefchar^^bb{\guillemetright{}} 9985 \gdefchar^^bc{$1\over4$} 9986 \gdefchar^^bd{$1\over2$} 9987 \gdefchar^^be{$3\over4$} 9988 \gdefchar^^bf{\questiondown} 9989 % 9990 \gdefchar^^c0{\`A} 9991 \gdefchar^^c1{\'A} 9992 \gdefchar^^c2{\^A} 9993 \gdefchar^^c3{\~A} 9994 \gdefchar^^c4{\"A} 9995 \gdefchar^^c5{\ringaccent A} 9996 \gdefchar^^c6{\AE} 9997 \gdefchar^^c7{\cedilla C} 9998 \gdefchar^^c8{\`E} 9999 \gdefchar^^c9{\'E} 10000 \gdefchar^^ca{\^E} 10001 \gdefchar^^cb{\"E} 10002 \gdefchar^^cc{\`I} 10003 \gdefchar^^cd{\'I} 10004 \gdefchar^^ce{\^I} 10005 \gdefchar^^cf{\"I} 10006 % 10007 \gdefchar^^d0{\DH} 10008 \gdefchar^^d1{\~N} 10009 \gdefchar^^d2{\`O} 10010 \gdefchar^^d3{\'O} 10011 \gdefchar^^d4{\^O} 10012 \gdefchar^^d5{\~O} 10013 \gdefchar^^d6{\"O} 10014 \gdefchar^^d7{$\times$} 10015 \gdefchar^^d8{\O} 10016 \gdefchar^^d9{\`U} 10017 \gdefchar^^da{\'U} 10018 \gdefchar^^db{\^U} 10019 \gdefchar^^dc{\"U} 10020 \gdefchar^^dd{\'Y} 10021 \gdefchar^^de{\TH} 10022 \gdefchar^^df{\ss} 10023 % 10024 \gdefchar^^e0{\`a} 10025 \gdefchar^^e1{\'a} 10026 \gdefchar^^e2{\^a} 10027 \gdefchar^^e3{\~a} 10028 \gdefchar^^e4{\"a} 10029 \gdefchar^^e5{\ringaccent a} 10030 \gdefchar^^e6{\ae} 10031 \gdefchar^^e7{\cedilla c} 10032 \gdefchar^^e8{\`e} 10033 \gdefchar^^e9{\'e} 10034 \gdefchar^^ea{\^e} 10035 \gdefchar^^eb{\"e} 10036 \gdefchar^^ec{\`{\dotless i}} 10037 \gdefchar^^ed{\'{\dotless i}} 10038 \gdefchar^^ee{\^{\dotless i}} 10039 \gdefchar^^ef{\"{\dotless i}} 10040 % 10041 \gdefchar^^f0{\dh} 10042 \gdefchar^^f1{\~n} 10043 \gdefchar^^f2{\`o} 10044 \gdefchar^^f3{\'o} 10045 \gdefchar^^f4{\^o} 10046 \gdefchar^^f5{\~o} 10047 \gdefchar^^f6{\"o} 10048 \gdefchar^^f7{$\div$} 10049 \gdefchar^^f8{\o} 10050 \gdefchar^^f9{\`u} 10051 \gdefchar^^fa{\'u} 10052 \gdefchar^^fb{\^u} 10053 \gdefchar^^fc{\"u} 10054 \gdefchar^^fd{\'y} 10055 \gdefchar^^fe{\th} 10056 \gdefchar^^ff{\"y} 10057} 10058 10059% Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions. 10060\def\latninechardefs{% 10061 % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1. 10062 \latonechardefs 10063 % 10064 \gdefchar^^a4{\euro{}} 10065 \gdefchar^^a6{\v S} 10066 \gdefchar^^a8{\v s} 10067 \gdefchar^^b4{\v Z} 10068 \gdefchar^^b8{\v z} 10069 \gdefchar^^bc{\OE} 10070 \gdefchar^^bd{\oe} 10071 \gdefchar^^be{\"Y} 10072} 10073 10074% Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions. 10075\def\lattwochardefs{% 10076 \gdefchar^^a0{\tie} 10077 \gdefchar^^a1{\ogonek{A}} 10078 \gdefchar^^a2{\u{}} 10079 \gdefchar^^a3{\L} 10080 \gdefchar^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} 10081 \gdefchar^^a5{\v L} 10082 \gdefchar^^a6{\'S} 10083 \gdefchar^^a7{\S} 10084 \gdefchar^^a8{\"{}} 10085 \gdefchar^^a9{\v S} 10086 \gdefchar^^aa{\cedilla S} 10087 \gdefchar^^ab{\v T} 10088 \gdefchar^^ac{\'Z} 10089 \gdefchar^^ad{\-} 10090 \gdefchar^^ae{\v Z} 10091 \gdefchar^^af{\dotaccent Z} 10092 % 10093 \gdefchar^^b0{\textdegree{}} 10094 \gdefchar^^b1{\ogonek{a}} 10095 \gdefchar^^b2{\ogonek{ }} 10096 \gdefchar^^b3{\l} 10097 \gdefchar^^b4{\'{}} 10098 \gdefchar^^b5{\v l} 10099 \gdefchar^^b6{\'s} 10100 \gdefchar^^b7{\v{}} 10101 \gdefchar^^b8{\cedilla\ } 10102 \gdefchar^^b9{\v s} 10103 \gdefchar^^ba{\cedilla s} 10104 \gdefchar^^bb{\v t} 10105 \gdefchar^^bc{\'z} 10106 \gdefchar^^bd{\H{}} 10107 \gdefchar^^be{\v z} 10108 \gdefchar^^bf{\dotaccent z} 10109 % 10110 \gdefchar^^c0{\'R} 10111 \gdefchar^^c1{\'A} 10112 \gdefchar^^c2{\^A} 10113 \gdefchar^^c3{\u A} 10114 \gdefchar^^c4{\"A} 10115 \gdefchar^^c5{\'L} 10116 \gdefchar^^c6{\'C} 10117 \gdefchar^^c7{\cedilla C} 10118 \gdefchar^^c8{\v C} 10119 \gdefchar^^c9{\'E} 10120 \gdefchar^^ca{\ogonek{E}} 10121 \gdefchar^^cb{\"E} 10122 \gdefchar^^cc{\v E} 10123 \gdefchar^^cd{\'I} 10124 \gdefchar^^ce{\^I} 10125 \gdefchar^^cf{\v D} 10126 % 10127 \gdefchar^^d0{\DH} 10128 \gdefchar^^d1{\'N} 10129 \gdefchar^^d2{\v N} 10130 \gdefchar^^d3{\'O} 10131 \gdefchar^^d4{\^O} 10132 \gdefchar^^d5{\H O} 10133 \gdefchar^^d6{\"O} 10134 \gdefchar^^d7{$\times$} 10135 \gdefchar^^d8{\v R} 10136 \gdefchar^^d9{\ringaccent U} 10137 \gdefchar^^da{\'U} 10138 \gdefchar^^db{\H U} 10139 \gdefchar^^dc{\"U} 10140 \gdefchar^^dd{\'Y} 10141 \gdefchar^^de{\cedilla T} 10142 \gdefchar^^df{\ss} 10143 % 10144 \gdefchar^^e0{\'r} 10145 \gdefchar^^e1{\'a} 10146 \gdefchar^^e2{\^a} 10147 \gdefchar^^e3{\u a} 10148 \gdefchar^^e4{\"a} 10149 \gdefchar^^e5{\'l} 10150 \gdefchar^^e6{\'c} 10151 \gdefchar^^e7{\cedilla c} 10152 \gdefchar^^e8{\v c} 10153 \gdefchar^^e9{\'e} 10154 \gdefchar^^ea{\ogonek{e}} 10155 \gdefchar^^eb{\"e} 10156 \gdefchar^^ec{\v e} 10157 \gdefchar^^ed{\'{\dotless{i}}} 10158 \gdefchar^^ee{\^{\dotless{i}}} 10159 \gdefchar^^ef{\v d} 10160 % 10161 \gdefchar^^f0{\dh} 10162 \gdefchar^^f1{\'n} 10163 \gdefchar^^f2{\v n} 10164 \gdefchar^^f3{\'o} 10165 \gdefchar^^f4{\^o} 10166 \gdefchar^^f5{\H o} 10167 \gdefchar^^f6{\"o} 10168 \gdefchar^^f7{$\div$} 10169 \gdefchar^^f8{\v r} 10170 \gdefchar^^f9{\ringaccent u} 10171 \gdefchar^^fa{\'u} 10172 \gdefchar^^fb{\H u} 10173 \gdefchar^^fc{\"u} 10174 \gdefchar^^fd{\'y} 10175 \gdefchar^^fe{\cedilla t} 10176 \gdefchar^^ff{\dotaccent{}} 10177} 10178 10179% UTF-8 character definitions. 10180% 10181% This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some 10182% changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by 10183% permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team. 10184% 10185\newcount\countUTFx 10186\newcount\countUTFy 10187\newcount\countUTFz 10188 10189\gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter 10190 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname} 10191% 10192\gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter 10193 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname} 10194% 10195\gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter 10196 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname} 10197 10198\gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{% 10199 \ifx #1\relax 10200 \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}% 10201 \else 10202 \expandafter #1% 10203 \fi 10204} 10205 10206% Give non-ASCII bytes the active definitions for processing UTF-8 sequences 10207\begingroup 10208 \catcode`\~13 10209 \catcode`\$12 10210 \catcode`\"12 10211 10212 % Loop from \countUTFx to \countUTFy, performing \UTFviiiTmp 10213 % substituting ~ and $ with a character token of that value. 10214 \def\UTFviiiLoop{% 10215 \global\catcode\countUTFx\active 10216 \uccode`\~\countUTFx 10217 \uccode`\$\countUTFx 10218 \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}% 10219 \advance\countUTFx by 1 10220 \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy 10221 \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop 10222 \fi} 10223 10224 % For bytes other than the first in a UTF-8 sequence. Not expected to 10225 % be expanded except when writing to auxiliary files. 10226 \countUTFx = "80 10227 \countUTFy = "C2 10228 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10229 \gdef~{% 10230 \ifpassthroughchars $\fi}}% 10231 \UTFviiiLoop 10232 10233 \countUTFx = "C2 10234 \countUTFy = "E0 10235 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10236 \gdef~{% 10237 \ifpassthroughchars $% 10238 \else\expandafter\UTFviiiTwoOctets\expandafter$\fi}}% 10239 \UTFviiiLoop 10240 10241 \countUTFx = "E0 10242 \countUTFy = "F0 10243 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10244 \gdef~{% 10245 \ifpassthroughchars $% 10246 \else\expandafter\UTFviiiThreeOctets\expandafter$\fi}}% 10247 \UTFviiiLoop 10248 10249 \countUTFx = "F0 10250 \countUTFy = "F4 10251 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10252 \gdef~{% 10253 \ifpassthroughchars $% 10254 \else\expandafter\UTFviiiFourOctets\expandafter$\fi 10255 }}% 10256 \UTFviiiLoop 10257\endgroup 10258 10259\def\globallet{\global\let} % save some \expandafter's below 10260 10261% @U{xxxx} to produce U+xxxx, if we support it. 10262\def\U#1{% 10263 \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax 10264 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 10265 % All Unicode characters can be used if native Unicode handling is 10266 % active. However, if the font does not have the glyph, 10267 % letters are missing. 10268 \begingroup 10269 \uccode`\.="#1\relax 10270 \uppercase{.} 10271 \endgroup 10272 \else 10273 \errhelp = \EMsimple 10274 \errmessage{Unicode character U+#1 not supported, sorry}% 10275 \fi 10276 \else 10277 \csname uni:#1\endcsname 10278 \fi 10279} 10280 10281% These macros are used here to construct the name of a control 10282% sequence to be defined. 10283\def\UTFviiiTwoOctetsName#1#2{% 10284 \csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}% 10285\def\UTFviiiThreeOctetsName#1#2#3{% 10286 \csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}% 10287\def\UTFviiiFourOctetsName#1#2#3#4{% 10288 \csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}% 10289 10290% For UTF-8 byte sequences (TeX, e-TeX and pdfTeX), 10291% provide a definition macro to replace a Unicode character; 10292% this gets used by the @U command 10293% 10294\begingroup 10295 \catcode`\"=12 10296 \catcode`\<=12 10297 \catcode`\.=12 10298 \catcode`\,=12 10299 \catcode`\;=12 10300 \catcode`\!=12 10301 \catcode`\~=13 10302 \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii#1#2{% 10303 \countUTFz = "#1\relax 10304 \begingroup 10305 \parseXMLCharref 10306 10307 % Give \u8:... its definition. The sequence of seven \expandafter's 10308 % expands after the \gdef three times, e.g. 10309 % 10310 % 1. \UTFviiTwoOctetsName B1 B2 10311 % 2. \csname u8:B1 \string B2 \endcsname 10312 % 3. \u8: B1 B2 (a single control sequence token) 10313 % 10314 \expandafter\expandafter 10315 \expandafter\expandafter 10316 \expandafter\expandafter 10317 \expandafter\gdef \UTFviiiTmp{#2}% 10318 % 10319 \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax \else 10320 \message{Internal error, already defined: #1}% 10321 \fi 10322 % 10323 % define an additional control sequence for this code point. 10324 \expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFviiiTmp 10325 \endgroup} 10326 % 10327 % Given the value in \countUTFz as a Unicode code point, set \UTFviiiTmp 10328 % to the corresponding UTF-8 sequence. 10329 \gdef\parseXMLCharref{% 10330 \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax 10331 \errhelp = \EMsimple 10332 \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}% 10333 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax 10334 \parseUTFviiiA,% 10335 \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctetsName.,% 10336 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax 10337 \parseUTFviiiA;% 10338 \parseUTFviiiA,% 10339 \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctetsName.{,;}% 10340 \else 10341 \parseUTFviiiA;% 10342 \parseUTFviiiA,% 10343 \parseUTFviiiA!% 10344 \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctetsName.{!,;}% 10345 \fi\fi\fi 10346 } 10347 10348 % Extract a byte from the end of the UTF-8 representation of \countUTFx. 10349 % It must be a non-initial byte in the sequence. 10350 % Change \uccode of #1 for it to be used in \parseUTFviiiB as one 10351 % of the bytes. 10352 \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{% 10353 \countUTFx = \countUTFz 10354 \divide\countUTFz by 64 10355 \countUTFy = \countUTFz % Save to be the future value of \countUTFz. 10356 \multiply\countUTFz by 64 10357 10358 % \countUTFz is now \countUTFx with the last 5 bits cleared. Subtract 10359 % in order to get the last five bits. 10360 \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz 10361 10362 % Convert this to the byte in the UTF-8 sequence. 10363 \advance\countUTFx by 128 10364 \uccode `#1\countUTFx 10365 \countUTFz = \countUTFy} 10366 10367 % Used to put a UTF-8 byte sequence into \UTFviiiTmp 10368 % #1 is the increment for \countUTFz to yield a the first byte of the UTF-8 10369 % sequence. 10370 % #2 is one of the \UTFviii*OctetsName macros. 10371 % #3 is always a full stop (.) 10372 % #4 is a template for the other bytes in the sequence. The values for these 10373 % bytes is substituted in here with \uppercase using the \uccode's. 10374 \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{% 10375 \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax 10376 \uccode `#3\countUTFz 10377 \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}} 10378\endgroup 10379 10380% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX), 10381% provide a definition macro that sets a catcode to `other' non-globally 10382% 10383\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeOther#1#2{% 10384 \catcode"#1=\other 10385} 10386 10387% https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plane_(Unicode)#Basic_M 10388% U+0000..U+007F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Basic_Latin_(Unicode_block) 10389% U+0080..U+00FF = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin-1_Supplement_(Unicode_block) 10390% U+0100..U+017F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-A 10391% U+0180..U+024F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-B 10392% 10393% Many of our renditions are less than wonderful, and all the missing 10394% characters are available somewhere. Loading the necessary fonts 10395% awaits user request. We can't truly support Unicode without 10396% reimplementing everything that's been done in LaTeX for many years, 10397% plus probably using luatex or xetex, and who knows what else. 10398% We won't be doing that here in this simple file. But we can try to at 10399% least make most of the characters not bomb out. 10400% 10401\def\unicodechardefs{% 10402 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}% 10403 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}% 10404 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A2}{{\tcfont \char162}}% 0242=cent 10405 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds{}}% 10406 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A4}{{\tcfont \char164}}% 0244=currency 10407 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A5}{{\tcfont \char165}}% 0245=yen 10408 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A6}{{\tcfont \char166}}% 0246=brokenbar 10409 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A7}{\S}% 10410 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}% 10411 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright{}}% 10412 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}% 10413 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft{}}% 10414 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AC}{\ensuremath\lnot}% 10415 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}% 10416 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol{}}% 10417 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}% 10418 % 10419 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }}% 10420 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B1}{\ensuremath\pm}% 10421 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B2}{$^2$}% 10422 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B3}{$^3$}% 10423 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}% 10424 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B5}{$\mu$}% 10425 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B6}{\P}% 10426 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B7}{\ensuremath\cdot}% 10427 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}% 10428 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B9}{$^1$}% 10429 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}% 10430 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright{}}% 10431 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BC}{$1\over4$}% 10432 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BD}{$1\over2$}% 10433 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BE}{$3\over4$}% 10434 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}% 10435 % 10436 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}% 10437 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}% 10438 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}% 10439 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}% 10440 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}% 10441 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}% 10442 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}% 10443 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}% 10444 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}% 10445 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}% 10446 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}% 10447 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}% 10448 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}% 10449 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}% 10450 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}% 10451 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}% 10452 % 10453 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH}% 10454 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}% 10455 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}% 10456 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}% 10457 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}% 10458 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}% 10459 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}% 10460 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D7}{\ensuremath\times}% 10461 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}% 10462 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}% 10463 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}% 10464 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}% 10465 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}% 10466 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}% 10467 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH}% 10468 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}% 10469 % 10470 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}% 10471 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}% 10472 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}% 10473 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}% 10474 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}% 10475 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}% 10476 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}% 10477 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}% 10478 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}% 10479 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}% 10480 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}% 10481 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}% 10482 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}% 10483 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}% 10484 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}% 10485 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}% 10486 % 10487 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh}% 10488 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}% 10489 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}% 10490 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}% 10491 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}% 10492 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}% 10493 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}% 10494 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F7}{\ensuremath\div}% 10495 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}% 10496 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}% 10497 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}% 10498 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}% 10499 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}% 10500 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}% 10501 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th}% 10502 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}% 10503 % 10504 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}% 10505 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}% 10506 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}% 10507 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}% 10508 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}}% 10509 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}}% 10510 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}% 10511 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}% 10512 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}% 10513 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}% 10514 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}% 10515 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}% 10516 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}% 10517 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}% 10518 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}% 10519 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010F}{d'}% 10520 % 10521 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0110}{\DH}% 10522 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0111}{\dh}% 10523 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}% 10524 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}% 10525 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}% 10526 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}% 10527 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}% 10528 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}% 10529 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}% 10530 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}% 10531 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}% 10532 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}% 10533 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}% 10534 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}% 10535 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}% 10536 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}% 10537 % 10538 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}% 10539 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}% 10540 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0122}{\cedilla{G}}% 10541 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0123}{\cedilla{g}}% 10542 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}% 10543 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}% 10544 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0126}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}% 10545 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0127}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}% 10546 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}% 10547 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}% 10548 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}% 10549 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}% 10550 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}% 10551 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}% 10552 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012E}{\ogonek{I}}% 10553 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012F}{\ogonek{i}}% 10554 % 10555 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}% 10556 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}% 10557 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}% 10558 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}% 10559 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}% 10560 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}% 10561 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0136}{\cedilla{K}}% 10562 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0137}{\cedilla{k}}% 10563 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0138}{\ensuremath\kappa}% 10564 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}% 10565 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}% 10566 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013B}{\cedilla{L}}% 10567 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013C}{\cedilla{l}}% 10568 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013D}{L'}% should kern 10569 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013E}{l'}% should kern 10570 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013F}{L\U{00B7}}% 10571 % 10572 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0140}{l\U{00B7}}% 10573 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}% 10574 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}% 10575 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}% 10576 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}% 10577 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0145}{\cedilla{N}}% 10578 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0146}{\cedilla{n}}% 10579 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}% 10580 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}% 10581 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0149}{'n}% 10582 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014A}{\missingcharmsg{ENG}}% 10583 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014B}{\missingcharmsg{eng}}% 10584 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}% 10585 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}% 10586 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}% 10587 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}% 10588 % 10589 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}% 10590 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}% 10591 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}% 10592 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}% 10593 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}% 10594 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}% 10595 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0156}{\cedilla{R}}% 10596 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0157}{\cedilla{r}}% 10597 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}% 10598 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}% 10599 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}% 10600 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}% 10601 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}% 10602 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}% 10603 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}% 10604 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}% 10605 % 10606 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}% 10607 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}% 10608 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{T}}% 10609 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{t}}% 10610 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}% 10611 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0165}{\v{t}}% 10612 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0166}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}% 10613 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0167}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}% 10614 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}% 10615 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}% 10616 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}% 10617 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}% 10618 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}% 10619 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}% 10620 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}% 10621 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}% 10622 % 10623 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}% 10624 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}% 10625 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0172}{\ogonek{U}}% 10626 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0173}{\ogonek{u}}% 10627 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}% 10628 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}% 10629 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}% 10630 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}% 10631 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}% 10632 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}% 10633 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}% 10634 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}% 10635 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}% 10636 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}% 10637 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}% 10638 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017F}{\missingcharmsg{LONG S}}% 10639 % 10640 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}% 10641 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}% 10642 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}% 10643 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}% 10644 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}% 10645 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}% 10646 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}% 10647 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}% 10648 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}% 10649 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}% 10650 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}% 10651 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}% 10652 % 10653 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}% 10654 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}% 10655 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}% 10656 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}% 10657 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}% 10658 % 10659 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}% 10660 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}% 10661 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}% 10662 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}% 10663 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}% 10664 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}% 10665 % 10666 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}% 10667 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}% 10668 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}% 10669 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}% 10670 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}% 10671 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}% 10672 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}% 10673 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}% 10674 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}% 10675 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}% 10676 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}% 10677 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}% 10678 % 10679 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}% 10680 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}% 10681 % 10682 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}% 10683 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}% 10684 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}% 10685 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}% 10686 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}% 10687 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}% 10688 % 10689 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}% 10690 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}% 10691 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}% 10692 % 10693 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02BC}{'}% 10694 % 10695 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }}% 10696 % 10697 % Greek letters upper case 10698 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0391}{{\it A}}% 10699 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0392}{{\it B}}% 10700 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0393}{\ensuremath{\mit\Gamma}}% 10701 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0394}{\ensuremath{\mit\Delta}}% 10702 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0395}{{\it E}}% 10703 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0396}{{\it Z}}% 10704 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0397}{{\it H}}% 10705 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0398}{\ensuremath{\mit\Theta}}% 10706 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0399}{{\it I}}% 10707 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039A}{{\it K}}% 10708 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039B}{\ensuremath{\mit\Lambda}}% 10709 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039C}{{\it M}}% 10710 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039D}{{\it N}}% 10711 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039E}{\ensuremath{\mit\Xi}}% 10712 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039F}{{\it O}}% 10713 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A0}{\ensuremath{\mit\Pi}}% 10714 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A1}{{\it P}}% 10715 %\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A2}{} % none - corresponds to final sigma 10716 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A3}{\ensuremath{\mit\Sigma}}% 10717 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A4}{{\it T}}% 10718 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A5}{\ensuremath{\mit\Upsilon}}% 10719 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A6}{\ensuremath{\mit\Phi}}% 10720 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A7}{{\it X}}% 10721 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A8}{\ensuremath{\mit\Psi}}% 10722 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A9}{\ensuremath{\mit\Omega}}% 10723 % 10724 % Vowels with accents 10725 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0390}{\ensuremath{\ddot{\acute\iota}}}% 10726 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AC}{\ensuremath{\acute\alpha}}% 10727 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AD}{\ensuremath{\acute\epsilon}}% 10728 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AE}{\ensuremath{\acute\eta}}% 10729 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AF}{\ensuremath{\acute\iota}}% 10730 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B0}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ddot\upsilon}}}% 10731 % 10732 % Standalone accent 10733 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0384}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ }}}% 10734 % 10735 % Greek letters lower case 10736 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B1}{\ensuremath\alpha}% 10737 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B2}{\ensuremath\beta}% 10738 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B3}{\ensuremath\gamma}% 10739 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B4}{\ensuremath\delta}% 10740 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B5}{\ensuremath\epsilon}% 10741 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B6}{\ensuremath\zeta}% 10742 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B7}{\ensuremath\eta}% 10743 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B8}{\ensuremath\theta}% 10744 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B9}{\ensuremath\iota}% 10745 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BA}{\ensuremath\kappa}% 10746 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BB}{\ensuremath\lambda}% 10747 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BC}{\ensuremath\mu}% 10748 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BD}{\ensuremath\nu}% 10749 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BE}{\ensuremath\xi}% 10750 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BF}{{\it o}}% omicron 10751 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C0}{\ensuremath\pi}% 10752 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C1}{\ensuremath\rho}% 10753 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C2}{\ensuremath\varsigma}% 10754 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C3}{\ensuremath\sigma}% 10755 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C4}{\ensuremath\tau}% 10756 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C5}{\ensuremath\upsilon}% 10757 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C6}{\ensuremath\phi}% 10758 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C7}{\ensuremath\chi}% 10759 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C8}{\ensuremath\psi}% 10760 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C9}{\ensuremath\omega}% 10761 % 10762 % More Greek vowels with accents 10763 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CA}{\ensuremath{\ddot\iota}}% 10764 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CB}{\ensuremath{\ddot\upsilon}}% 10765 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CC}{\ensuremath{\acute o}}% 10766 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CD}{\ensuremath{\acute\upsilon}}% 10767 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CE}{\ensuremath{\acute\omega}}% 10768 % 10769 % Variant Greek letters 10770 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D1}{\ensuremath\vartheta}% 10771 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D6}{\ensuremath\varpi}% 10772 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03F1}{\ensuremath\varrho}% 10773 % 10774 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}% 10775 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}% 10776 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}% 10777 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}% 10778 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}% 10779 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}% 10780 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}% 10781 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}% 10782 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}% 10783 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}% 10784 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}% 10785 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}% 10786 % 10787 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}% 10788 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}% 10789 % 10790 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}% 10791 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}% 10792 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}% 10793 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}% 10794 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}% 10795 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}% 10796 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}% 10797 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}% 10798 % 10799 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}% 10800 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}% 10801 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}% 10802 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}% 10803 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}% 10804 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}% 10805 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}% 10806 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}% 10807 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}% 10808 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}% 10809 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}% 10810 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}% 10811 % 10812 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}% 10813 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}% 10814 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}% 10815 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}% 10816 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}% 10817 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}% 10818 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}% 10819 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}% 10820 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}% 10821 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}% 10822 % 10823 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}% 10824 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}% 10825 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}% 10826 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}% 10827 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}% 10828 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}% 10829 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}% 10830 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}% 10831 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}% 10832 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}% 10833 % 10834 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}% 10835 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}% 10836 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}% 10837 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}% 10838 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}% 10839 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}% 10840 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}% 10841 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}% 10842 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}% 10843 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}% 10844 % 10845 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}% 10846 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}% 10847 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}% 10848 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}% 10849 % 10850 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}% 10851 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}% 10852 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}% 10853 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}% 10854 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}% 10855 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}% 10856 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}% 10857 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}% 10858 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}% 10859 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}% 10860 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}% 10861 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}% 10862 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}% 10863 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}% 10864 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}% 10865 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}% 10866 % 10867 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}% 10868 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}% 10869 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}% 10870 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}% 10871 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}% 10872 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}% 10873 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}% 10874 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}% 10875 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}% 10876 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}% 10877 % 10878 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}% 10879 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}% 10880 % 10881 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}% 10882 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}% 10883 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}% 10884 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}% 10885 % 10886 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}% 10887 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}% 10888 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}% 10889 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}% 10890 % 10891 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}% 10892 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}% 10893 % 10894 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}% 10895 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}% 10896 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}% 10897 % 10898 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}% 10899 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}% 10900 % 10901 % Punctuation 10902 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}% 10903 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}% 10904 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft{}}% 10905 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright{}}% 10906 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase{}}% 10907 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft{}}% 10908 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright{}}% 10909 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase{}}% 10910 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2020}{\ensuremath\dagger}% 10911 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2021}{\ensuremath\ddagger}% 10912 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet{}}% 10913 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{202F}{\thinspace}% 10914 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots{}}% 10915 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft{}}% 10916 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright{}}% 10917 % 10918 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro{}}% 10919 % 10920 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion{}}% 10921 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result{}}% 10922 % 10923 % Mathematical symbols 10924 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2200}{\ensuremath\forall}% 10925 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2203}{\ensuremath\exists}% 10926 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2208}{\ensuremath\in}% 10927 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus{}}% 10928 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\ast}% 10929 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221E}{\ensuremath\infty}% 10930 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2225}{\ensuremath\parallel}% 10931 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2227}{\ensuremath\wedge}% 10932 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2229}{\ensuremath\cap}% 10933 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv{}}% 10934 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2264}{\ensuremath\leq}% 10935 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2265}{\ensuremath\geq}% 10936 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2282}{\ensuremath\subset}% 10937 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2287}{\ensuremath\supseteq}% 10938 % 10939 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2016}{\ensuremath\Vert}% 10940 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2032}{\ensuremath\prime}% 10941 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{210F}{\ensuremath\hbar}% 10942 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2111}{\ensuremath\Im}% 10943 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2113}{\ensuremath\ell}% 10944 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2118}{\ensuremath\wp}% 10945 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{211C}{\ensuremath\Re}% 10946 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2135}{\ensuremath\aleph}% 10947 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2190}{\ensuremath\leftarrow}% 10948 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2191}{\ensuremath\uparrow}% 10949 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2193}{\ensuremath\downarrow}% 10950 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2194}{\ensuremath\leftrightarrow}% 10951 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2195}{\ensuremath\updownarrow}% 10952 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2196}{\ensuremath\nwarrow}% 10953 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2197}{\ensuremath\nearrow}% 10954 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2198}{\ensuremath\searrow}% 10955 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2199}{\ensuremath\swarrow}% 10956 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A6}{\ensuremath\mapsto}% 10957 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A9}{\ensuremath\hookleftarrow}% 10958 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21AA}{\ensuremath\hookrightarrow}% 10959 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BC}{\ensuremath\leftharpoonup}% 10960 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BD}{\ensuremath\leftharpoondown}% 10961 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C0}{\ensuremath\rightharpoonup}% 10962 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C1}{\ensuremath\rightharpoondown}% 10963 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21CC}{\ensuremath\rightleftharpoons}% 10964 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D0}{\ensuremath\Leftarrow}% 10965 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D1}{\ensuremath\Uparrow}% 10966 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D3}{\ensuremath\Downarrow}% 10967 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D4}{\ensuremath\Leftrightarrow}% 10968 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D5}{\ensuremath\Updownarrow}% 10969 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2202}{\ensuremath\partial}% 10970 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2205}{\ensuremath\emptyset}% 10971 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2207}{\ensuremath\nabla}% 10972 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2209}{\ensuremath\notin}% 10973 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220B}{\ensuremath\owns}% 10974 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220F}{\ensuremath\prod}% 10975 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2210}{\ensuremath\coprod}% 10976 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2211}{\ensuremath\sum}% 10977 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2213}{\ensuremath\mp}% 10978 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2218}{\ensuremath\circ}% 10979 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221A}{\ensuremath\surd}% 10980 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221D}{\ensuremath\propto}% 10981 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2220}{\ensuremath\angle}% 10982 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2223}{\ensuremath\mid}% 10983 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2228}{\ensuremath\vee}% 10984 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222A}{\ensuremath\cup}% 10985 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222B}{\ensuremath\smallint}% 10986 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222E}{\ensuremath\oint}% 10987 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{223C}{\ensuremath\sim}% 10988 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2240}{\ensuremath\wr}% 10989 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2243}{\ensuremath\simeq}% 10990 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2245}{\ensuremath\cong}% 10991 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2248}{\ensuremath\approx}% 10992 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{224D}{\ensuremath\asymp}% 10993 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2250}{\ensuremath\doteq}% 10994 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2260}{\ensuremath\neq}% 10995 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226A}{\ensuremath\ll}% 10996 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226B}{\ensuremath\gg}% 10997 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227A}{\ensuremath\prec}% 10998 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227B}{\ensuremath\succ}% 10999 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2283}{\ensuremath\supset}% 11000 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2286}{\ensuremath\subseteq}% 11001 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{228E}{\ensuremath\uplus}% 11002 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2291}{\ensuremath\sqsubseteq}% 11003 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2292}{\ensuremath\sqsupseteq}% 11004 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2293}{\ensuremath\sqcap}% 11005 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2294}{\ensuremath\sqcup}% 11006 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2295}{\ensuremath\oplus}% 11007 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2296}{\ensuremath\ominus}% 11008 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2297}{\ensuremath\otimes}% 11009 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2298}{\ensuremath\oslash}% 11010 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2299}{\ensuremath\odot}% 11011 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A2}{\ensuremath\vdash}% 11012 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A3}{\ensuremath\dashv}% 11013 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A4}{\ensuremath\ptextop}% 11014 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A5}{\ensuremath\bot}% 11015 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A8}{\ensuremath\models}% 11016 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C0}{\ensuremath\bigwedge}% 11017 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C1}{\ensuremath\bigvee}% 11018 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C2}{\ensuremath\bigcap}% 11019 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C3}{\ensuremath\bigcup}% 11020 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C4}{\ensuremath\diamond}% 11021 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C5}{\ensuremath\cdot}% 11022 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C6}{\ensuremath\star}% 11023 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C8}{\ensuremath\bowtie}% 11024 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2308}{\ensuremath\lceil}% 11025 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2309}{\ensuremath\rceil}% 11026 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230A}{\ensuremath\lfloor}% 11027 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230B}{\ensuremath\rfloor}% 11028 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2322}{\ensuremath\frown}% 11029 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2323}{\ensuremath\smile}% 11030 % 11031 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B3}{\ensuremath\triangle}% 11032 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B7}{\ensuremath\triangleright}% 11033 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25BD}{\ensuremath\bigtriangledown}% 11034 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C1}{\ensuremath\triangleleft}% 11035 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C7}{\ensuremath\diamond}% 11036 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2660}{\ensuremath\spadesuit}% 11037 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2661}{\ensuremath\heartsuit}% 11038 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2662}{\ensuremath\diamondsuit}% 11039 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2663}{\ensuremath\clubsuit}% 11040 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266D}{\ensuremath\flat}% 11041 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266E}{\ensuremath\natural}% 11042 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266F}{\ensuremath\sharp}% 11043 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{26AA}{\ensuremath\bigcirc}% 11044 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27B9}{\ensuremath\rangle}% 11045 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27C2}{\ensuremath\perp}% 11046 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27E8}{\ensuremath\langle}% 11047 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F5}{\ensuremath\longleftarrow}% 11048 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F6}{\ensuremath\longrightarrow}% 11049 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F7}{\ensuremath\longleftrightarrow}% 11050 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27FC}{\ensuremath\longmapsto}% 11051 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{29F5}{\ensuremath\setminus}% 11052 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A00}{\ensuremath\bigodot}% 11053 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A01}{\ensuremath\bigoplus}% 11054 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A02}{\ensuremath\bigotimes}% 11055 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A04}{\ensuremath\biguplus}% 11056 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A06}{\ensuremath\bigsqcup}% 11057 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A3F}{\ensuremath\amalg}% 11058 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AAF}{\ensuremath\preceq}% 11059 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AB0}{\ensuremath\succeq}% 11060 % 11061 \global\mathchardef\checkmark="1370% actually the square root sign 11062 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2713}{\ensuremath\checkmark}% 11063}% end of \unicodechardefs 11064 11065% UTF-8 byte sequence (pdfTeX) definitions (replacing and @U command) 11066% It makes the setting that replace UTF-8 byte sequence. 11067\def\utfeightchardefs{% 11068 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii 11069 \unicodechardefs 11070} 11071 11072% Whether the active definitions of non-ASCII characters expand to 11073% non-active tokens with the same character code. This is used to 11074% write characters literally, instead of using active definitions for 11075% printing the correct glyphs. 11076\newif\ifpassthroughchars 11077\passthroughcharsfalse 11078 11079% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX), 11080% provide a definition macro to replace/pass-through a Unicode character 11081% 11082\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative#1#2{% 11083 \catcode"#1=\active 11084 \def\dodeclareunicodecharacternative##1##2##3{% 11085 \begingroup 11086 \uccode`\~="##2\relax 11087 \uppercase{\gdef~}{% 11088 \ifpassthroughchars 11089 ##1% 11090 \else 11091 ##3% 11092 \fi 11093 } 11094 \endgroup 11095 } 11096 \begingroup 11097 \uccode`\.="#1\relax 11098 \uppercase{\def\UTFNativeTmp{.}}% 11099 \expandafter\dodeclareunicodecharacternative\UTFNativeTmp{#1}{#2}% 11100 \endgroup 11101} 11102 11103% Native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX) character replacing definition. 11104% It activates the setting that replaces Unicode characters. 11105\def\nativeunicodechardefs{% 11106 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative 11107 \unicodechardefs 11108} 11109 11110% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX), 11111% make the character token expand 11112% to the sequences given in \unicodechardefs for printing. 11113\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU#1#2{% 11114 \def\UTFAtUTmp{#2} 11115 \expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFAtUTmp 11116} 11117 11118% @U command definitions for native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX). 11119\def\nativeunicodechardefsatu{% 11120 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU 11121 \unicodechardefs 11122} 11123 11124% US-ASCII character definitions. 11125\def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done 11126 \relax 11127} 11128 11129% Define all Unicode characters we know about. This makes UTF-8 the default 11130% input encoding and allows @U to work. 11131\iftxinativeunicodecapable 11132 \nativeunicodechardefsatu 11133\else 11134 \utfeightchardefs 11135\fi 11136 11137\message{formatting,} 11138 11139\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt 11140 11141\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt 11142\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt 11143\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt 11144 11145% Prevent underfull vbox error messages. 11146\vbadness = 10000 11147 11148% Don't be very finicky about underfull hboxes, either. 11149\hbadness = 6666 11150 11151% Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans. 11152\widowpenalty=10000 11153\clubpenalty=10000 11154 11155% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're 11156% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of 11157% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on 11158% \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set. 11159% 11160\def\setemergencystretch{% 11161 \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined 11162 % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. 11163 \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% 11164 \else 11165 \emergencystretch = .15\hsize 11166 \fi 11167} 11168 11169% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 11170% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; 11171% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width. 11172% 11173% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define 11174% \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip. 11175% 11176\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% 11177 \voffset = #3\relax 11178 \topskip = #6\relax 11179 \splittopskip = \topskip 11180 % 11181 \vsize = #1\relax 11182 \advance\vsize by \topskip 11183 \outervsize = \vsize 11184 \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin 11185 \txipageheight = \vsize 11186 % 11187 \hsize = #2\relax 11188 \outerhsize = \hsize 11189 \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in 11190 \txipagewidth = \hsize 11191 % 11192 \normaloffset = #4\relax 11193 \bindingoffset = #5\relax 11194 % 11195 \ifpdf 11196 \pdfpageheight #7\relax 11197 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax 11198 % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of 11199 % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with. 11200 \pdfhorigin = 1 true in 11201 \pdfvorigin = 1 true in 11202 \else 11203 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 11204 \special{papersize=#8,#7}% 11205 \else 11206 \pdfpageheight #7\relax 11207 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax 11208 % XeTeX does not have \pdfhorigin and \pdfvorigin. 11209 \fi 11210 \fi 11211 % 11212 \setleading{\textleading} 11213 % 11214 \parindent = \defaultparindent 11215 \setemergencystretch 11216} 11217 11218% @letterpaper (the default). 11219\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 11220 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 11221 \textleading = 13.2pt 11222 % 11223 % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. 11224 \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines 11225 {\voffset}{.25in}% 11226 {\bindingoffset}{36pt}% 11227 {11in}{8.5in}% 11228}} 11229 11230% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size. 11231\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 11232 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt 11233 \textleading = 12pt 11234 % 11235 \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}% 11236 {-.2in}{0in}% 11237 {\bindingoffset}{16pt}% 11238 {9.25in}{7in}% 11239 % 11240 \lispnarrowing = 0.3in 11241 \tolerance = 700 11242 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11243 \defbodyindent = .5cm 11244}} 11245 11246% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. 11247\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 11248 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 11249 \textleading = 13.2pt 11250 % 11251 % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050 11252 % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm. 11253 % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust 11254 % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then 11255 % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in 11256 % your texinfo source file like this: 11257 % @tex 11258 % \global\normaloffset = -6mm 11259 % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm 11260 % @end tex 11261 \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines 11262 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 11263 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 11264 {297mm}{210mm}% 11265 % 11266 \tolerance = 700 11267 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11268 \defbodyindent = 5mm 11269}} 11270 11271% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper. 11272% From [email protected], 2 July 2000. 11273% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small. 11274\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1 11275 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt 11276 \textleading = 12.5pt 11277 % 11278 \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}% 11279 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 11280 {\bindingoffset}{8pt}% 11281 {210mm}{148mm}% 11282 % 11283 \lispnarrowing = 0.2in 11284 \tolerance = 800 11285 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11286 \defbodyindent = 2mm 11287 \tableindent = 12mm 11288}} 11289 11290% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. 11291\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 11292 \afourpaper 11293 \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}% 11294 {\voffset}{4.6mm}% 11295 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 11296 {297mm}{210mm}% 11297 % 11298 % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper. 11299 \globaldefs = 0 11300}} 11301 11302% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format. 11303\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1 11304 \afourpaper 11305 \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}% 11306 {\voffset}{-2.95mm}% 11307 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 11308 {297mm}{210mm}% 11309 \globaldefs = 0 11310}} 11311 11312\def\bsixpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 11313 \afourpaper 11314 \internalpagesizes{140mm}{100mm}% 11315 {-6.35mm}{-12.7mm}% 11316 {\bindingoffset}{14pt}% 11317 {176mm}{125mm}% 11318 \let\SETdispenvsize=\smallword 11319 \lispnarrowing = 0.2in 11320 \globaldefs = 0 11321}} 11322 11323 11324% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] 11325% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, 11326% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. 11327% 11328\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} 11329\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% 11330 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi 11331 \globaldefs = 1 11332 % 11333 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 11334 \setleading{\textleading}% 11335 % 11336 \dimen0 = #1\relax 11337 \advance\dimen0 by 2.5in % default 1in margin above heading line 11338 % and 1.5in to include heading, footing and 11339 % bottom margin 11340 % 11341 \dimen2 = \hsize 11342 \advance\dimen2 by 2in % default to 1 inch margin on each side 11343 % 11344 \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}% 11345 {\voffset}{\normaloffset}% 11346 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 11347 {\dimen0}{\dimen2}% 11348}} 11349 11350% Set default to letter. 11351% 11352\letterpaper 11353 11354% Default value of \hfuzz, for suppressing warnings about overfull hboxes. 11355\hfuzz = 1pt 11356 11357 11358\message{and turning on texinfo input format.} 11359 11360\def^^L{\par} % remove \outer, so ^L can appear in an @comment 11361 11362% DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice. 11363\catcode`\^^? = 14 11364 11365% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. 11366\catcode`\"=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"} 11367\catcode`\$=\other \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix 11368\catcode`\+=\other \def\normalplus{+} 11369\catcode`\<=\other \def\normalless{<} 11370\catcode`\>=\other \def\normalgreater{>} 11371\catcode`\^=\other \def\normalcaret{^} 11372\catcode`\_=\other \def\normalunderscore{_} 11373\catcode`\|=\other \def\normalverticalbar{|} 11374\catcode`\~=\other \def\normaltilde{~} 11375 11376% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt 11377% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts, 11378% where something hairier probably needs to be done. 11379% 11380% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print 11381% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero 11382% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all 11383% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. 11384% 11385\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} 11386 11387% Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches 11388% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from 11389% italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway 11390% this is not a problem. 11391\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} 11392 11393% Set catcodes for Texinfo file 11394 11395% Active characters for printing the wanted glyph. 11396% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can 11397% use math or other variants that look better in normal text. 11398% 11399\catcode`\"=\active 11400\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} 11401\let"=\activedoublequote 11402\catcode`\~=\active \def\activetilde{{\tt\char126}} \let~ = \activetilde 11403\chardef\hatchar=`\^ 11404\catcode`\^=\active \def\activehat{{\tt \hatchar}} \let^ = \activehat 11405 11406\catcode`\_=\active 11407\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} 11408\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em } 11409\let\realunder=_ 11410 11411\catcode`\|=\active \def|{{\tt\char124}} 11412 11413\chardef \less=`\< 11414\catcode`\<=\active \def\activeless{{\tt \less}}\let< = \activeless 11415\chardef \gtr=`\> 11416\catcode`\>=\active \def\activegtr{{\tt \gtr}}\let> = \activegtr 11417\catcode`\+=\active \def+{{\tt \char 43}} 11418\catcode`\$=\active \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix 11419\catcode`\-=\active \let-=\normaldash 11420 11421 11422% used for headline/footline in the output routine, in case the page 11423% breaks in the middle of an @tex block. 11424\def\texinfochars{% 11425 \let< = \activeless 11426 \let> = \activegtr 11427 \let~ = \activetilde 11428 \let^ = \activehat 11429 \setregularquotes 11430 \let\b = \strong 11431 \let\i = \smartitalic 11432 % in principle, all other definitions in \tex have to be undone too. 11433} 11434 11435% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after 11436% parsing them. 11437\def\turnoffactive{% 11438 \normalturnoffactive 11439 \otherbackslash 11440} 11441 11442\catcode`\@=0 11443 11444% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font, 11445% as in \char`\\. 11446\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\ 11447 11448% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other. 11449{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\}} 11450 11451% In Texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash 11452% in fixed width font. 11453\catcode`\\=\active % @ for escape char from now on. 11454 11455% Print a typewriter backslash. For math mode, we can't simply use 11456% \backslashcurfont: the story here is that in math mode, the \char 11457% of \backslashcurfont ends up printing the roman \ from the math symbol 11458% font (because \char in math mode uses the \mathcode, and plain.tex 11459% sets \mathcode`\\="026E). Hence we use an explicit \mathchar, 11460% which is the decimal equivalent of "715c (class 7, e.g., use \fam; 11461% ignored family value; char position "5C). We can't use " for the 11462% usual hex value because it has already been made active. 11463 11464@def@ttbackslash{{@tt @ifmmode @mathchar29020 @else @backslashcurfont @fi}} 11465@let@backslashchar = @ttbackslash % @backslashchar{} is for user documents. 11466 11467% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with 11468% catcode other. 11469@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash} 11470 11471% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of 11472% the literal character `\'. 11473% 11474{@catcode`- = @active 11475 @gdef@normalturnoffactive{% 11476 @passthroughcharstrue 11477 @let-=@normaldash 11478 @let"=@normaldoublequote 11479 @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix 11480 @let+=@normalplus 11481 @let<=@normalless 11482 @let>=@normalgreater 11483 @let^=@normalcaret 11484 @let_=@normalunderscore 11485 @let|=@normalverticalbar 11486 @let~=@normaltilde 11487 @let\=@ttbackslash 11488 @setregularquotes 11489 @unsepspaces 11490 } 11491} 11492 11493% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file 11494% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. 11495% So turn them off again, and have @fixbackslash turn them back on. 11496@catcode`+=@other @catcode`@_=@other 11497 11498% \enablebackslashhack - allow file to begin `\input texinfo' 11499% 11500% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. 11501% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing 11502% a backslash. 11503% If the file did not have a `\input texinfo', then it is turned off after 11504% the first line; otherwise the first `\' in the file would cause an error. 11505% This is used on the very last line of this file, texinfo.tex. 11506% We also use @c to call @fixbackslash, in case ends of lines are hidden. 11507{ 11508@catcode`@^=7 11509@catcode`@^^M=13@gdef@enablebackslashhack{% 11510 @global@let\ = @eatinput% 11511 @catcode`@^^M=13% 11512 @def@c{@fixbackslash@c}% 11513 % Definition for the newline at the end of this file. 11514 @def ^^M{@let^^M@secondlinenl}% 11515 % Definition for a newline in the main Texinfo file. 11516 @gdef @secondlinenl{@fixbackslash}% 11517 % In case the first line has a whole-line command on it 11518 @let@originalparsearg@parsearg 11519 @def@parsearg{@fixbackslash@originalparsearg} 11520}} 11521 11522{@catcode`@^=7 @catcode`@^^M=13% 11523@gdef@eatinput input texinfo#1^^M{@fixbackslash}} 11524 11525% Emergency active definition of newline, in case an active newline token 11526% appears by mistake. 11527{@catcode`@^=7 @catcode13=13% 11528@gdef@enableemergencynewline{% 11529 @gdef^^M{% 11530 @par% 11531 %<warning: active newline>@par% 11532}}} 11533 11534 11535@gdef@fixbackslash{% 11536 @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @ttbackslash @fi 11537 @catcode13=5 % regular end of line 11538 @enableemergencynewline 11539 @let@c=@comment 11540 @let@parsearg@originalparsearg 11541 % Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input 11542 % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. 11543 @catcode`+=@active 11544 @catcode`@_=@active 11545 % 11546 % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. 11547 % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. This macro, @fixbackslash, gets 11548 % called at the beginning of every Texinfo file. Not opening texinfo.cnf 11549 % directly in this file, texinfo.tex, makes it possible to make a format 11550 % file for Texinfo. 11551 % 11552 @openin 1 texinfo.cnf 11553 @ifeof 1 @else @input texinfo.cnf @fi 11554 @closein 1 11555} 11556 11557 11558% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. 11559@escapechar = `@@ 11560 11561% These (along with & and #) are made active for url-breaking, so need 11562% active definitions as the normal characters. 11563@def@normaldot{.} 11564@def@normalquest{?} 11565@def@normalslash{/} 11566 11567% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. 11568% @hashchar{} gets its own user-level command, because of #line. 11569@catcode`@& = @other @def@normalamp{&} 11570@catcode`@# = @other @def@normalhash{#} 11571@catcode`@% = @other @def@normalpercent{%} 11572 11573@let @hashchar = @normalhash 11574 11575@c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and 11576@c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we 11577@c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars. 11578@c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments. 11579@catcode`@'=@active 11580@catcode`@`=@active 11581@setregularquotes 11582 11583@c Local variables: 11584@c eval: (add-hook 'before-save-hook 'time-stamp nil t) 11585@c time-stamp-pattern: "texinfoversion{%Y-%02m-%02d.%02H}" 11586@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message\\|emacs-page" 11587@c End: 11588 11589@c vim:sw=2: 11590 11591@enablebackslashhack 11592 11593
